Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 257

DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES 1

information
valuable
Battery -
ECON BATTERY - VALUABLE INFORMATION

Initial charging of the batteries


For initial charging, the following charging instructions apply which decide
whether "to be or not to be"
16.8-volt MF batteries initial charging:

BatteryMate 150/9 – MF mode or OptiMate Pro 4S, OptiMate ProS


Trickle charging: from 14.2 to 14.3 volts - all TecMate chargers

Initial charging of normal batteries from 14.2 to 14.3 volts: All TecMate chargers
Trickle charging: from 14.2 to 14.3 volts - all TecMate chargers.

GEL batteries initial charging, e.g. BMW, from 14.2 to 14.5 volts
BatteryMate 150/9 – Normal mode 14.7 volts or OptiMate Pro 4S, pos. DC
Trickle charging: All TecMate chargers

With regard to this, the manufacturer's instructions must


be necessarily observed!

Battery discharge conditions


A severely discharged battery is said to be sulphated. This is due, in fact, to lead
sulphate building up on the plates. For chemistry fans: Lead (Pb) combined with
H2S04 sulphuric acid yields Pb S04. Lead sulphate and H2O (water). In most cases,
however, batteries only undergo a “normal” discharging process. The table below
shows discharge conditions in % with respect to battery voltage.
It is highly surprising that a "classic" battery is 50% discharged with 12.10 volts!

Charge percentage MF batteries Classic batteries


100% 13,10 Volts 12,60 Volts
75% 12,70 Volts 12,30 Volts
50% 12,30 Volts 12,10 Volts
25% 11,90 Volts 11,40 Volts
0% 11,50 Volts 10,80 Volts

Most chargers available on the market cannot recognise and revive batteries
below 10 volts. OptiMate can partially revive batteries that have only a 2-volt
residual voltage!

In the recovery mode, charging is done with up to 22 volts!

In this case, the battery should not be charged in the vehicle.

1/01
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
1 DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES
information
valuable
Battery -

ECON
BATTERY - VALUABLE INFORMATION

WHY YOU NEED AN OPTIMATE


LITHIUM BATTERY CHARGER.
Guaranteed! : More battery power - Higher battery life - Save your lithium battery with low voltage.

A LITHIUM battery provides the same starting current as


the lead battery that it replaces, but with 3 to 4 times
less amperes.
Ah
A switched off vehicle with a constantly active user extracts its battery
during an amperstunden: a lithium battery is discharged faster.

COMPARISON:

Battery size that can


supply 120 START-UP
10AH 8AH 2,5AH
= 120 C.A.
AMP.
STD AGM LITHIUM

The voltage range of a LITHIUM battery is higher


VOLT Than that of a lead acid.
A lead acid battery charger does not fully charge a lithium battery.
The vehicle charging system is designed for the lower voltage of a lead battery;
Idle or low speed loses a lithium battery charge.
11,8V 12,0V 12,2V 12,4V 12,6V 12,8V 13,0V 13,2V 13,4V 13,6V
VOLT AND% LOAD:
0 25 50 75 100%
STD
STD-LEAD BATTERY 0 25 50 75 100%
AGM-LEAD BATTERY AGM
LiFePO4 LITHIUM 0 25 50 75 100%
LITHIUM

An empty LITHIUM battery requires little power to


safely recover.
SAVING AN
At low voltage, lead-acid batteries provide a high current that damages a
EMPTY
lithium battery.
BATTERY
14,4V
CHARGING CURRENT LITHIUM
13V
LEAD BATTERY AND 12V
LITHIUM 8V
LEAD BATTERY
2V

A LITHIUM battery requires an exact charge


voltage.
CHARGE Voltages above 14.6V will damage lithium
batteries. Some lead battery chargers deliver
more than 14.6V.
13,6V 13,8V 14,0V 14,2V 14,4V 14,6V 14,8V
CHARGING CURRENT
LEAD BATTERY STD
AND LITHIUM AGM
LITHIUM

1/02
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES 1

Chargers
Battery
ECON BATTERY - CHARGERS

10100-40 OptiMATE 1

NEW 100% automatic battery charger


SAE
- Safe, long-term battery care around
the hour
- Optimised battery power and life
expectancy

Scope of delivery:
Eyelet type terminal with cap - SAE
Alligator clip set - SAE

Suitable for all Charging capacity Battery size: 2

AGM 12-volt batteries 0,6 Amp. - 12 Volt - 50 Ah

10100-50 OptiMATE 2
100% automatic battery charger
- It extends the battery life
- Safe, long-term battery care
- Sealed, weatherproof housing (IP54)
SAE
OptiMATE 2 is a fully automatic
battery charger and trickle
device that you can "plug in
and forget."

Scope of delivery:
Charger with wall bracket attached
Eyelet type terminal with cap - SAE
Alligator clip set - SAE

Charging capacity
0.8 amp. - 12 volts
Battery size:
Suitable for all 3 - 96 Ah -
Charge conservation > 96 Ah
AGM 12-volt batteries

1/03
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
1 DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES
Chargers
Battery

BATTERY - CHARGERS ECON

Automatic
10101-00 OptiMATE 3 impedance matching
Suitable for all 12-volt starter batteries.

Charging capacity - 0.8 amp. max


Desulphation of severely discharged
batteries
Waterproof housing with wall bracket SAE
attached.
Low power consumption -
high level of efficiency.

Clear and informative digital display.

Supply of delivery: Charger with


attached wall bracket attached, eyelet
type terminal and alligator clip set.
Charging capacity
Short-circuit-proof device protected against 0.8 amp. - 12 volts
AGM reverse polarity. Spark suppression,
overheating protection. Battery size:
2,5 - 50 Ah -
Charge conservation > 50 Ah

Fully automatic loading and maintenance works, etc.


Desulfation mode

10101-01 OptiMATE 3 x 4 - Quadbank

10101-02 OptiMATE 3 x 2 - Duobank

1/04
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES 1

Chargers
Battery
BATTERY - CHARGERS

10100-10 OptiMATE4 Dual


CAN-BUS enabled charger
Microprocessor-controlled, automatic charging and
testing device.

Comprehensive, informative display screen.


Waterproof housing with integrated
wall bracket. IP64
Reverse polarity protection, short-circuit-proof Charging capacity
Very low power consumption thanks to high 0,8 Amp. - 12 Volts
efficiency, shorter charging times.
Supply of delivery: Charger with attached Battery size:
Wall bracket, eyelet type terminal and 2 - 50 Ah -
alligator clip set. Charge conservation > 50 Ah

Fully-automatic charging and conservation


AGM
desulphation mode

10100-20 OptiMATE4 CAN-Bus ready


OptiMate 4 Dual Program CAN-bus edition
includes two charging programs; program 1
is for direct charging of a battery, program 2 SAE
allows safe and unsupervised charging
through a BMW motorcycle’s CAN-bus
controlled 12V socket.

In addition, the device has a universal


voltage input and is therefore ideal for the
globetrotter among your customers. Even
older models without a CAN bus can benefit
from this new product, as it also offers the
OptiMate 4 standard program.

Scope of delivery:Charger with attached


wall bracket, plug for car socket and
alligator clip set. Charging capacity
0,8 Amp. - 12 Volts

Battery size:
2 - 50 Ah -
Charge conservation > 50 Ah

1/05
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
1 DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES
Chargers
Battery

BATTERY - CHARGERS ECON

10166-00 AccuMate 6 + 12 V
6 or 12 volt switchable charger and cling device.
Unique in this combination.
The device for the vintage car enthusiasts with
6-volt vehicles - cars and motorcycles.
Automatic 3-stage charger and cling device for
all standard, MF, GEL, AGM starter batteries.

Technical data / features:


220-volt input voltage
(special voltages available)
2-stage status indicator: charged/full,
1 reverse polarity display, 6/12 volt
selector switch with light-emitting diode.
Equipped with eyelet type terminal for direct connection
to the battery, including fuse.
1 Plus/Minus clamp pliers set, short-circuit-proof
device protected against reverse polarity.
Spark suppression, overheating protection. Charging capacity
1.2 amp. (max)
Battery size:
Fully automatic approx. 4 - 75 Ah -
charging and conservation Charge conservation > 75 ah

10102-85 OptiMate 5 voltmatic 6 + 12 V


Advanced 6V & 12V battery care for power
sport / auto / marine size batteries.

• Desulfated 6V and 12V batteries


• Automatic 6V / 12V selection
SAE
OptiMate 5 VoltMatic can SAVE & CHARGE
all 6V & 12V lead-acid batteries. Simply
connect the charger to the battery, the
VoltMatic micro-processor automatically
makes the correct charge voltage selection
for a 6V battery in any condition or healthy*
12V battery and then proceeds to charging.
Scope of delivery:
Charger with attached wall bracket
Ösenkabel mit Kappe
Krokodilklemmensatz
Charging capacity
AGM 2,8 Amp. (max. 12V)
4,0 Amp. (max. 6V)

Battery size:
8 - 120 Ah (12V)
10 - 192 Ah (6V)
Fully automatic
1/06 charging and conservation
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES 1

Chargers
Battery
ECON BATTERY - CHARGERS

10102-80 OptiMATE 5
Battery care of medium and large
12 V batteries

Did you forget your battery throughout the winter? SAE


OptiMATE5 revives your severely discharged battery
and charges it optimally. It is then checked whether
the charge can be maintained.
By charging with OptiMATE5 voltage is
maintained for months.
- It desulphates and saves severely discharged batteries
- It optimises battery power and service life
- Safe and long-term maintenance cycle
- Automatic battery test every hour
- 2.8 amp charging capacity

Recommended for AGM/MF-, standard, GEL Charging capacity


and spiral cell batteries from 7.5 Ah to 120 Ah 2.8 amp. - 12 volts
Technical data: Battery size:
Programming 5 phases, fully autom. 7.5 - 120 Ah -
Input current max. 0.90 A at 230 V
Annual energy costs +/- 1€ Charge conservation > 120 Ah
Output current (main charge) 2.8 A
Autom. desulphation YES
Charging time limitation No The universal tool for
AGM Maintenance/test cycles every hour alternately
Housing rating IP54 12-V battery care!
Input cable length 2m

400%
Output cable length 2m

Included accessories: It enhances service life up to


- SAE-71 cable set with ring cable lugs and
fuse, weatherproof
- SAE-74 clamp set for charging outside the
vehicle

10102-90 OptiMATE 6
The new OptiMATE6 Ampmatic is the worldwide
most advanced and versatile battery charger,
maintenance unit andtester. All in one unit, in a SAE
chic, sturdy, weatherproof housing.
Once the device is connected,
the Ampmatic microprocessor automatically
diagnoses the condition of your battery and sets
the optimal charging current and the right
programme.

Technical data:
programme control Ampmatic microprocessor
annual electricity costs <1 € (continuous maintenance) Charging
output current 0.4 A - 5.0 A capacity
Charging time limit 48 hours (maintenance unlimit.) 0.4 - 5 Amp. -
Charge retention test 5 levels "good" - "bad"
Housing protection class IP54 12 volts
Input cable length 2m
Output cable length 2m
Battery size:
Warranty 3 years up to 240 Ah
Ampmatic control -
Included accessories:
- SAE-71 cable set with ring cable lugs and automatic adjustment
AGM fuse, weatherproof of the optimal charging current
- SAE-74 clamp set for charging outside the
vehicle

1/07
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
1 DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES
Chargers
Battery

BATTERY - CHARGERS ECON

10100-30 OptiMATE Lithium


The FIRST battery charger specifically

LFP for LiFePO4 rechargeable batteries


-
-
safeTº precise battery monitoring
Ampmatic adaptation to the battery size
SAE
- Battery power and service life optimisation
- TESTED before and after charging
- RECOVERY MODE in low battery voltage
OptiMATE Lithium, the first OptiMATE to protect your
LiFePO4 battery like no other charger can so far!
The new OptiMATE Lithium protects your investment
and guarantees that your lithium iron phosphate battery
(LiFePO4 / LFP) is just as powerful and remains
as specified - and over a long period of time.
With the available charging current of up to 5 amps
of OptiMATE Lithium and the unique, multi-stage
Ampmatic programme, the device charges and
counterbalances theindividual cells of a battery quickly
and efficiently.
The OptiMATE Lithium maintenance program supplies
connected switching circuits on the vehicle with current,
protects and keeps the charging state of the battery
at 100%.

10100-35 OptiMATE Lithium 0,8


The affordable maintenance device
for LiFePO4 batteries.

• Special LiFeP 4 maintenance


• Protects LiFeP 4 batteries
SAE
LFP • Optimized battery performance and lifetime

The new OptiMate Lithium 0.8A protects your


investment and ensures that your lithium iron
phosphate battery will last for a long time.
The unique LiFePO4-specific program ensures
efficient and safe charging and balancing of the cells
in the battery.
Charging
power 0.8 Amp.
Battery size:
Scope of delivery: up to 50 Ah
Ösenkabel mit Kappe
Krokodilklemmensatz

10100-36 OptiMATE Lithium 0,8


Quadbank

1/08
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES 1

Chargers
Battery
ECON BATTERY - CHARGERS

10510-00 HF100 battery charger


The HF 100 loads and maintains the 12V
battery of scooter, quad, motorbike, watercraft,
snowmobile, mower and work vehicles.
Automatically organizes the charge of gel, AGM
and MF batteries.
In the event of a power failure, the HF100 stops
charging. This is continued at the point stored
by the microprocessor when the current flows
again.

Automatic 4-step charging and maintenance device

Scope of delivery:
• loop cable
• Crocodile clamp set

Charging power
1 Amp. - 12 Volt
Battery size:
1 - 30 Ah,
Load retention 1 - 70 Ah

AGM

10525-00 Sirius 4
• Reverse polarity protection
• Automatic voltage selection 6 or 12 Volt

• Automatic selection of the battery type


• Display, digital graphics with
background lighting
• Hook fastening

Charging power
1 - 4 Amp.
Battery size: 4
- 80 Ah

a: Preparation protection
b c f g h b: Damaged battery
c: 12V battery
a d: 6V battery
e: Charge state
d f: Slow Charge (1A / Motorcycles)
g: Quick Charge (4A / Auto) Winter
e i
h: mode
i: Voltage (volts)
1/09
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
1 DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES
Chargers
Battery

BATTERY - CHARGERS ECON

10527-00 MEGAlithium
High-performance start-up aid
• For professional use
• Fully Safety System Protection:
• Polarity reversal
• Short circuit
• Voltage error
• Overload
• discharge
• Overheat protection

Output current: 800 A


Output voltage: 12V
Peak output current: 1800 A
Terminal output: 850A
Cable length: 50cm
Cable cross section: CU 10 mm2
Maximum charging voltage: 14,5V
Auto battery charger: 12V 1A
Battery type: Reverse Lithium LifePo4
polarity protection: Yes
Short circuit protection: Yes
Surge protection: Yes
Size (mm): Yes
Weight (Kg): 260 x 135 x 72
2,5 Kg

10526-00 Zeus
High-performance start-up aid
• Portable lithium booster
• Portable charger
• Ultralight LED flashlight
• Equipped with electronic
Protection against polarity
reversal and short circuit

Only suitable for private use! Battery Capacity: 15000 mAH


USB port: 5V 2,1/1A
Input: CC/CV 15V/1A
Starting current: > 300A
Peak current: 600A (<3S)

Display USB output


tablet

USB output
Starter cable smartphone
socket
Charging
socket

ON / OFF switch
Flashlight display / flashlight key

1/10
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES 1

Chargers
Battery
ECON BATTERY - CHARGERS

10102-60 OptiMATE PRO-S NEW 2 - 4 amps


adjustable
12 V / NEW 2-4 amps
5-stage charger and cling device with
automatic desulphation of severely discharged
batteries > 2 volts (charging voltage with
control current up to 22 volts) when required.

Adjustable charging power, NEW 2-4 amp device


protected against short circuit, reverse polarity,
misuse.

4-LED displays for battery condition,


1 operating light, 1 reverse polarity display.
Charging capacity
Main charging phase 14,3 Volt - constant current
4 amps (max)
Float mode 13,6 Volt
Battery size:
Initial charging of new 2 - 40 Ah
MF batteries - NEW setting Charge conservation > 40 Ah

Fully automatic charging and conservation

An inexpensive charger for the workshop!


10102-70 OptiMATE PRO-2
An advanced microprocessor-controlled diagnostics
and recovery battery charger: testing, charging
and preservation of lead-acid batteries.
Ideal for initial and continuous charging of new
motorcycle AGM batteries.
Each of the 2 x 12 V batteries is charged
simultaneously and independently, or a 24-volt battery.

Diagnostics and recovery: timely detection


of disconnected cells, detects desulphation,
2-stage desulphation mode

It optimises the main charge (initial charging),


2 x 2 A constant current charge, constant
current control
It checks optimal charging

Complete
battery management
for 2 batteries.
Charging capacity
04 -2 amps at each output
Suitable for initial charging!
Battery size:
2 - 100 Ah
Charge conservation > 100 ah

1/11
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
1 DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES
Chargers
Battery

BATTERY - CHARGERS ECON

10104-00 AccuMate Pro


12 + 24 volt switchable
Versatile, automatic 3-stage compact charger for
starter and deep-cycle lead/acid batteries, with a
capacity of at least 17 Ah (12 V), or 9 Ah (24 V).
3-stage "IUoU" charging algorithm, basic charge
at constant current until voltage has increased to
14.4 V (at 20° C). In the absorption phase, voltage
is maintained at 14.4 V until the charging current
taken from the battery decreases to 1/6 of the
full charging current. Voltage is limited to 13.7
volts in float mode.
12 volts / 7 amps Charging capacity,
24 volts / 3.5 amps Charging capacity
Charging capacity Battery size:
7 amps (Max) approx. 17 - 300 Ah
Charge conservation > 300 Ah

Fully automatic charging and conservation

Accessory connection cable "TM version"


10101-03 10101-06
Eyelet type terminal with plug GPS/Navigation
and "waterproof" cap socket 24 mm

10101-20
Battery connection cable /
10101-04 Alligator clip set
Plug for on-board
socket or
cigar lighter
10101-30 Charger
extension cable 2.5 m

10101-05
10-mm on-board socket with 10101-35 Charger
waterproof cover for fitting to vehicle
extension cable 2.5 m

1/12
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES 1

accessories
Charger
ECON
CHARGER - ACCESSORIES
for OptiMate and AccuMate
New accessory connector cable with SAE connection
10101-41 Eyelet type terminal with plug
and "waterproof" cap

10101-42 Plug for on-board socket or


cigar lighter

10101-43 Battery connection cable


Alligator clip set

10101-44 Charger extension


cable 1.8 m

10101-45 Gps/Navigation socket


24 mm
10101-46 Adapter SAE output
TM cable (previous connection)

10101-47 12-mm on-board socket


with waterproof cover to
be attached to the vehicle

10101-48 Plug for on-board socket

10101-49 Adapter TM-output-


SAE cabel SAE 17

10101-60 12-mm on-board socket


Metal bush with spring loaded
cap - mounted on the vehicle SAE 18

10101-61 DUCATI-Adapter
for Modelle >2010
SAE 47

10101-62 MV Agusta-Adapter
for Modelle >2010
SAE 57

10101-65 Y-Splitter
With fuses, length: 50 cm

SAE 05

1/13
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
1 DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES
Chargers
Battery

CHARGER - ACCESSORIES ECON

USB / LED / Monitor accessories with SAE connection


10101-59 USB charger adapter
• USB-A 1 m extension
• USB mini adapter
• USB micro adapter
SAE 100
10101-57 USB charger
• Connected cable, length 2 m
• USB mini adapter
• USB micro adapter SAE 102

10101-64 USB cable set USB A 1m


• 2 types of mini and microadapters:
Circuit with different resistances
which allows the charging of
different devices Mikro (2 Typen) SAE 109 Mini (2 Typen)

10101-52 12 V 6-LED diagnostic light


• Tests whether the motorcycle charging system
And whether the battery is
charged _
<
• Green: charging voltage 14V<_ SAE 120
• Red: battery voltage 12,3V

10101-54 Reload warning display


• For AGM & GEL batteries
• Flashes when battery voltage
< 12,5V
SAE 122
10101-55 Reload warning display
• For STD / wet cell batteries
• Flashes when battery voltage
< 12,35V
SAE 123

10101-66 Battery monitoring


• 4 LEDs monitor the battery status
• With fuse SAE 124
• Length 60 cm
• Direct connection to battery
10101-67 Battery monitoring SAE 125
• 4 LEDs monitor the battery status
• Length 15 cm
• For use with loop cable
10101-68 Battery monitoring
• For lithium batteries
• 4 LEDs monitor the battery status
• Length 15 cm
SAE 127

1/14
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES 1

accessories
Charger
ECON CHARGER - ACCESSORIES

DC-DC charger

Solar-Panel

Discover our
complete range of
accessories.

1/15
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
1 DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES
Chargers
Battery

BATTERY - CHARGERS ECON

10105-00 AccuMate Pro 5


12 volts 5 x 1.8 amps
3-stage multiple charger to simultaneously
charge 5 batteries, even if they have different sizes
IUoU 3-stage charging mode.

Electronically protected device, no sparks, reverse


polarity protected. An inexpensive device, suitable
for a variety of applications. Irreplaceable where
several batteries need to be charged simultaneously.

If a battery must or should be charged faster,


you can connect multiple outputs to a battery,
Charging capacity max. 9 amps! Charging capacity
9 amps (Max)
AGM Battery size:
For use in the workshop, for collectors
or owners of multiple vehicles!
approx. 6 - 90 Ah
Charge conservation > 90 ah
Fully-automatic charging and conservation
10107-10 OptiMATE PRO-4 - 12 Volts
A must-have for the workshop!
4 outputs to simultaneously charge up to 4 batteries,
suitable for all lead-acid batteries.
Selector switch for brand new batteries
(initial charging) or for used, second-hand batteries.
Recovery and desulphating mode Charger with
microprocessor control and Ampmatic
(automatic adjustment of the charging current
to the battery size). Automatic Detection and
activation for severely discharged batteries;
when an unnaturally high internal resistance
is present, the battery is supplied with high voltage
up to 22 volts (only with Optimate) to stimulate
the current flow in the battery; after the battery Charging capacity
has recovered, voltage is automatically reduced 4 amps (max.)
and normal charging begins until the battery
is fully charged; then the device switches to test
Battery size:
mode and monitors the battery. 2 - 40 Ah
Charge conservation > 40 Ah

10102-51 OptiMATE PRO-8


6/12 volts 8 x 1 amps
- to simultaneously charge up to 8 batteris
- for 6 and 12 volts
- automatic recovery of severely discharged
batteries
- battery and self-discharge testing
- it takes permanent care of fully charged batteries

The new OptiMATE PRO-8 is a versatile maintenance


device for 6/12-V batteries and up to 8 batteries
simultaneously. It can be used for charging Charging capacity
starter batteries. 8 amps (max)
To easily connect up to 8 (even different) batteries, Battery size:
controlled by a single, multi-stage programme. 2 - 48 Ah
Countless types of connection are possible.
Charge conservation > 48 ah
1/16
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES 1

testing devices
charging and
BATTERY CHARGING AND

Battery
ECON TESTING DEVICES
10184-00 BatteryMate 150/9
The automatic, multi-stage,
12-volt charger for the workshop
- 6 charging current settings 1 - 9 A
for batteries >2.5 V.

- Special MF programme

- Desulphation by automatic
identification

- Adjustable charging time

A
A
GM
GM - Load test of the battery
at the press of a button

Desulphation mode Suitable for initial charging!


Required or recommended by all major motorcycle manufacturers!

10184-01 Wall holder for Battery Mate 150/9


10108-00 Battery tester, electronic
Type TestMate Sport
For batteries of 2 - 35 Ah.

User-friendly, results within seconds


on a clear display with language selection.

Display results
according to electronic test:
- Battery OK and ready
- Battery OK needs to be charged
- Defective battery needs to be replaced
Battery cold cranking amps = CCA

10108-10 Battery tester electronic


Type TestMate Automobile
Functions and display as
for TestMate Sport.

Batteries of 2 - 200 Ah
10108-20 Battery tester
electronic, with printer

1/17
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
1 DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES
Testing devices
Battery

BATTERY - TESTING DEVICES ECON


10108-50 OptiMate Test 1
Starter current + light machine tester
Battery and charging system in 3 steps analyze
1 - Check battery charge level. A low battery cranks (starts
engine) poorly.
2 - Start engine. OptiMate TEST records and indicates (for
20 sec) the lowest start volts.
3 - With engine running, verify charging
voltage from alternator and voltage
regulator.

10108-51 OptiMate Test 2


State of charge
Battery testing deivce for all lead batteries
and LiFeP04 / LFP lithium batteries
Charge state result in VOLT &%.
User-friendly!
Connect the clips to the battery and read
the result.

10108-01 Analogue battery tester


- Effective configuration at 100 amps
- For testing 6- and 12-volt batteries up to 1,000 CCA
- To check the battery charge, the current capacity of
the battery, the output power, the charging system
and the starter.
- Top-mounted toggle switch for better and
easy operation

10108-03 Battery and Alternator


Tester
• for fault diagnosis of 12V battery and charging systems
• easy to use, just connect and check indicator lights
• LED's are electronically controlled
• 3 LED's for battery test:
LED red = battery empty or defective
LED yellow = battery OK
LED green = battery very good
• 3 more LED's for alternator test:
LED green = charging system OK
LED yellow = charging system OK
(maximum charging voltage)
LED red = charging system is not OK
(it may damage the battery
and other parts of the electric system)
1/18
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES 1

Service devices
Battery
ECON BATTERY - SERVICE DEVICES
10109-00 Pressure lifter for acid
It is placed on commercially available jerry cans
for acid or distilled water.

With a squeeze bulb, a slight overpressure


is generated.

Suitable for battery acid or distilled water.

Pressure
10110-00 Filling gun
Acid-resistant gun with good dosing
capability Always use in conjunction with
pressure lifter No. 10109-00
Gun also suitable for distilled water

10112-10 Battery Acid Tester


• easy to use
• very effective at a low price

10000-00 Battery poles grease


Container: 1-kg can

It protects poles against corrosion

10010-00 Battery pole spray 400 ml


Permanent blue and temperature-resistant film
protecting battery poles, pole terminals and plug connections
against corrosion, weather exposure and battery acid

Notice: thoroughly clean and install battery poles,


pole terminals, etc., and then spray them thinly on all sides.

Spray bottles
made of natural polyethylene (LD-PE);
angled dispensing tube with a fine tip
acid and chemical resistant
dosing by pressure on the bottle
extremely wide areas of application

60231-00 500 ml

60232-00 1000 ml

1/19
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
1
Synchroni- DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES
sation

SYNCHRONISATION ECON

10117-00 Synchronizing device Waterproof


VacuumMate Allweather
Connection on the intake manifold
Accurate monitoring of intake negative pressures
via four-channel LED display.
Rotational speed display up to 2,000 rev/min
For carburettors and fuel injection engines, diagnostics
on leaking inlet and outlet valves.
The device is supplied with 8 connection adapters (M5/M6),
including carrying case, connection terminals and 4 hoses.
Three selectable function modes offer a
comprehensive synchronisation solution:
- „RPM“ - mode to set the engine rotational speed
during the synchronisation of 2- and 4-stroke engines.
- „AVE“ - mode with 3 overlapping scales of 5-55 cm hg
and fixed resolution with 0.5 cm hg for general synchronising.
- „DYN“ - mode for troubleshooting - through visual inspection if
the engine is not synchronised. Possible causes of the problem may be The best-seller
for example a faulty valve or a crack in the intake manifold.

10420-00 Synchronising device Not more expensive than


SynchroMate a watch -
2-channel complete kit (two cylinders) yet better!
Precise electronic carburettor synchronisation
for multiple carburettor engines, especially for 2-cylinder engines.
High accuracy, resolution of 0.2 cm Hg
No friction or inertia. Sturdy, no glass.
None of the usual drawbacks that can be
found, for example, in synchronous clocks.

Supply of delivery:
4 threaded connection adapter, 2 x 5 and 2 x 6 mm
Battery connection cable, manual and T-piece adapter
Anleitung und T-Stück

Specially designed for two-cylinder engines

Option:

10420-01 4-channel
expansion kit
Special adapter kit for 4-cylinder engines with
four carburettors or fuel injection with throttle valves.

1/18
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES 1

Synchronisation
ECON SYNCHRONISATION

Spare parts and accessories - synchronisation

10117-01 Connection adapter


M5 (4 pcs) Teflon, pliable
10117-02 Connection adapter
M6 (4 pcs) Teflon, pliable

10117-03 Hose adapter *


M5 with cap - short
for poorly accessible synchronous connections

10117-04 Hose adapter *


M6 with cap - short
for poorly accessible synchronous connections

10117-05 Hose adapter *


M5 with cap - long (400 mm)
for poorly accessible synchronous connections

10117-06 Hose adapter *


M5 with cap - long (400 mm)
for poorly accessible synchronous connections

*to remain on the motorbike

10115-00 25-piece Carburetor


Tester
• for synchronal testing of 2-4 carburetors
• for cars and motor bikes
• 4 manometers, Ø 92.5 mm
• 4 hoses 8 x 5 x 750 mm
• 4 replacements gaskets
• 4 connectors 53 mm (M6x0.75)
• 4 connectors 60 mm (M6x1.00)
• 4 extensions 3.9 x 52 mm
• 4 extensions 3.9 x 122 mm

1/21
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
1 DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES
instruments
Measuring

MEASURING INSTRUMENTS ECON

10173-00 Digital Multimeter


• 3.5 Digits LCD
• low battery indication
• overload protection
• manual range selection
• safety sockets and plugs
• range:
• DC Voltage 200 mV, 2000 mV, 20 V, 200 V, 250 V
• AC Voltage 200 V, 250 V
• DC Current 200 µA, 2000µA, 20 mA, 200 mA, 10 A
• resistance 200 Ohm, 2000 Ohm, 20 kOhm,
200 kOhm, 2000 kOhm
• audible continuity sounds under 50 Ohm
• diode test with read forward voltage

10171-50 Multimeter
Inexpensive version.
Digital LCD display,
VDA socket,
COM input,
transistor button.
Functions:
DC voltage (V DC),
AC voltage (V AC),
Direct current (A DC),
Resistance Temperature
Temperature °C sensor

10171-00 Multimeter
Measuring instrument for all automotive applications
Functions:
Direct / alternating current, DC / AC voltage Temperature sensor
Dwell, resistance, frequency, diode test,
rotational speed measurement function,
temperature measurement in °C/°F, induction
tweezers.
Features:
automatic shutoff,
battery discharge status display,
protection of current circuits through fuse,
double display: digital and
bar graph display.

Speed pliers
10119-10 Digital ammeter and
multimeter with mini pliers
• Small and handy
for use on the vehicle
• Memory function
• Measuring selector
• Stop button for the momentary value
• Zero point correction without disconnection
• Device including cables and test prods
• Many measurement opportunities

Measuring functions:
Amps 0 - 200 A
4 Volts - 600 V
Ohms 0.1 - 10 K
Hz 40 - 1000

1/22
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES 1

Instruments
Measuring
ECON MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

10171-20 Automotive Digital Multimeter


with USB Interface
• ideal automotive measuring tool
• suitable for 2 and 4-stroke engines
• illuminated 3 5/6 digit display
• USB port for connection to PC
• auto-range, automatically selects the range size
• relative mode, enables differential measurement
• data hold function, freezes the measured value
• overload indication
• low battery indicator
• measuring ranges:
• DC voltage: 6 - 60 - 600 - 1000V
• AC voltage: 6 - 60 - 600 - 1000V
• DC current: 60 mA - 600 mA - 6A - 20A
• AC current: 60 mA - 600mA - 6A - 20A
• Resistance: 600 Ohm - 6 KOhm - 600 KOhm
6 MOhm - 60 MOhm
• Continuity: buzzer sounds under 20 Ohm
• Diode: test current approx. 0.8 mA
• Capacity: 40nF to 4000uF • Beinhaltet: Temperatur-Messsonde,
• Temperature: -20 ° C to 400 ° C Kondensatoradapter, Induktivzange,
• Frequency: 10 Hz to 10 MHz 2 Messkabel, USB-Kabel,
• Duty cycle: 0.5% to 99.9%
CD mit Treiber/Software,
• Speed : 120 to 20,000 rpm
• Dwell: (0-90 °) - (0-72 °) - (0-60 °) - (0-45 °) Tasche und 9V Batterie
• Pulse width: 0.5ms to 20ms

10172-10 15-piece Universal Line


and Accessories Assortment
• for use with multimeters, testing lights etc.
• 2 cables each 100 and 50 cm, red and blue
• 2 colored LED testing leads for polarity test
• 1 wire piercing probe
• 4 needle testing cables, red and black
• 2 testing tips, red and black
• 2 crocodile clamps, red and black
• suitable for automotive applications up to 24V, 10A

10140-40 Voltage and


continuity tester
Voltage, continuity, polarity and phase
tester phase tester
- Large LCD display with bar graph
- LCD with AC / DC display 6V, 12V,
24V, 50V, 120V, 230V, 400V, 690V
- Polarity detection shown on the LCD display
- Continuity test with audible signal
- Phase rotation test
- Integrated pocket lamp
- Dustproof and watertight IP64 housing
- CAT III 1000V/Cat IV 600V overvoltage class
- Self-test button for voltage testing

1/23
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
1 DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES
instruments
Measuring

MEASURING INSTRUMENTS ECON

10140-00 Test lamp (metal)


Test lamp in a metal design with
plug-in needle and protective cap.

Measuring range 6-24 V.

10136-10 Sound level meter


Measurement of the volume.
e.g. traffic, cars, motorcycles,
alarms, workshops, AUK
(emissions test on motorcycles)
Digital display with analogue graphics
40db to 130db
Accuracy + / - 2db
Fast and slow reading mode

Infrared thermometer
with laser pointer
Specifically for applications in and around the vehicle.
Exhaust pipe, cooling water, tyres, brakes,
engine housing (oil temperature), asphalt, etc.

10137-01 -20°C - +420°C Fig. 10137-02

10137-04 -50°C - +1000°C

10186-00 Timing light SKB 82


Analogue

Suitable for 4- and 2-stroke engines


Ignition adjustment angle 0-60°
Connection to vehicle battery 12 V
Separately available diesel adapter

10186-50 Digital Stroboscopic Gun


for Gasoline Engines
• angle adjustment allows for precise
electronic flash of the markers
• especially suitable for engines that have no
angle mark on the pulley
• further measurements are possible over the
easy-to-read 7-segment display:
• Dwell at 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 8-
cylinder engines
• Voltage and Power Loss Test
• Motor speed

1/24
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
Ignition
1

systems

Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
IGNITION SYSTEMS - VALUABLE INFORMATION
DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES

IGNITION COIL IGNITION COIL


With Controlled with
Breaker transistor
contact (BPI) Unit (TCI)
(=Transistor ignition FTI)
SPARK
PLUG SPARK
PLUG
PULSE GENERATOR
BREAKER

The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
COIL
CONTACTS TRIGGER
CIRCUIT
Ignition systems

With MHTC (Magneto High-tension Capacitor) Ignition System With BHC (Bosch High-tension Capacitor) Ignition System
IGNITION COIL
CHARGING COIL IGNITION COIL
CONTROLLER
CIRCUIT
PULSE GENERATOR
COIL DRIVE SPARK PULSE GENERATOR
PLUG COIL
CIRCUIT DRIVE
CIRCUIT
SPARK
PLUG
Contact controlled magneto ignition system Transistor or thyristor controlled
TRANSMITTER COIL IGNITION COIL
ignition system
IGNITION COIL
ECON

DRIVE
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
CONTACTS SPARK
PLUG SPARK
PLUG

1/25
1 DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES
instruments
Measuring

MEASURING INSTRUMENTS ECON

10113-00 Ignition tester


IgnitionMate
The handy universal
ignition tester
for high and low voltage.

IgnitionMate reliably indicates the condition


of each ignition system: high-tension capacitor,
transistor or simple contact ignition, no matter
whether the design is digital or analogue.

Two typical examples:


The spark current and the ignition spark voltage
can be displayed simultaneously on the two LED
panels by simply clamping the pickup clamp over
the ignition cable. Spark current and voltage are
displayed on one panel, while on the other, any
other pulse is requested, for example, the voltage
of the transmitter coil, the capacitor charge coil, the
primary coil, The ignition coil or the battery voltage.

Recommended by motorcycle manufacturers.

10113-01 Adapter cable


For connecting IgnitionMate in
Spare part
ignition coils with integrated spark plug
connectors.
Also suitable for connecting a timing light.

10113-10 Ignition tester


IgnitionMate Duo
IgnitionMate Duo is a handy,
portable tester for motorcycle
diagnostics specialists.

High accuracy and sensitivity.

Rugged and splash-proof.


It displays the ignition and peak
voltage pulses of 2 cylinders at
the same time upon reaching one
millisecond.

It compares the voltage occurring on


the primary ignition side or the spark
strengths of two cylinders at the same time.

Possible thanks to the rechargeable


NiMH battery incorporated in the device.

1/26
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES 1

Testing devices
Engine
ECON TESTING DEVICES - ENGINE

10163-01 Pressure loss tester Air pressure


DRV 05 input
Check the OT pressure loss with the vehicle
in operating temperature state,
input pressure (air) 6-12 bar.
Green field display = Pressure loss OK
If the pointer falls under the green field = engine
(cylinder, piston) is defective.
Locate noise points:
Exhaust manifold, inlet manifold,
oil filling port, cooling water filler necks
Damage analysis:
fault in the outlet valve, inlet valve, piston, Supply of delivery:
piston rings, cylinder head gasket Spark plug adapter: M10, 12, 14, 18
To auscultate,
use the ECON STETHOSCOPE.

Flexadapter DRV 05
10163-05 M8 x 1
10163-06 M10 x 1
10163-07 M12 x 1,25
10163-08 M14 x 1,25

10154-02 Compression tester


analogue with all common
spark plug adapters
This professional set includes a complete
product range for most motorcycle and
passenger car engines.
The package includes a support part which
enables valve seal repairs on the cylinder head
without removing it from the engine.
This complete set with quick couplings and
overpressure parts, which keeps readings as
long as necessary, is a must for automotive mechanics.

10158-00 Compression tester


digital
with manometer, vent valve,
adapter connection via
quick coupling, incl. adapter
M10, M12 + M14.
Delivered in a case.

10163-02 Adapter M10


for pressure loss tester
10163-03 Adapter M12
for pressure loss tester

1/27
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
1
Testing devices DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES
Engine

TESTING DEVICES - ENGINE ECON

10144-00 Oil pressure test kit


Testing device to check the oil pressure. The testing device
is connected instead of activating the oil pressure switch.
- Dual band scale 0...10 bar / 0...140 psi
- Addition of other adapters possible
Precision manometer NG 80 with sturdy GSK,
Test hose 1.00 m long with quick coupling.

Adapter: M10x1 / M12x1 / M14x1,5 / M16x1,5 / M18x1,5

Other adapters on request

10125-00 Compression
recorder, complete set
Fig. 1-7
1 10126-00 Compression 3
recorder, individual 1
with 100 chart sheets for Otto engines
Measuring range from 3.5 to 17.5 bar
8 10125-01 Extension adapter 150 mm/M10

8 10125-02 Extension adapter 150 mm/M12


7
8 10125-03 Extension adapter 150 mm/M14

10125-05 Extension 105 mm


2 10125-06 Extension 70 mm 8
3 10125-09 Spare chart sheets - 100 pieces

4 10127-00 Extension 140 mm with


rubber cone f. spark plug holes M10/M12

5 10128-00 Extension angle 70°


6 10129-00 Hose with plug connection
flexible, 350 mm long 4
7 10131-00 Rubber cone with support 70 m
m lon
(30°, 21 mm Æ) g
7 10131-01 Rubber cone with support 5 2
(63°, 17 mm Æ)

10131-02 Rubber cone with support 6


(63°, 21 mm Æ)

10132-00 Check valve


(Spare part not shown)

1/28
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES 1

Testing devices
Engine
ECON TESTING DEVICES - ENGINE

10350-00 Spark plug socket wrench


flexible - Plug starter
(Insertion aid for
hard-to-access spark plugs)

10137-05 Heat-resistant glove


100% DuPont material.
The heat-resistant Kevlar material protects
the skin from burns when working with hot
items or on the engine.
Suitable for right and left arms.
Kevlar material

10133-00 Stethoscope, mechanical


To quickly and easily locate
noises in bearings and other engine parts.

10161-10 Ultrasound stethoscope


electronically amplified
- Ideal for leaky tyres
- Suitable for the inspection and monitoring
of vacuum and compressed air outlets
(compressed air pressure gas installations, etc.),
electrical systems (insulation failures, sparking,
interconnection, etc.), A/C systems, LPG systems, etc.
- The set includes a receiver for the acoustic
back coupling (LED display), two anodised probes
(air + contact), headphones, and 9-volt batteries

10151-01 Testing device for


reverse polarity check
Testing possibilities:
- Cable is marked plus or minus
- Red/green LED display
- Continuity test (switches, relays, fuses, cable harnesses).
- Determination of poor earth connections.

Delivered with 6 m cable

1/29
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
1
Testing devices DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES
Engine

TESTING DEVICES - ENGINE ECON

10825-00 Test light


Pliable test light for difficult-to-access
places. Ideal as a support for endoscopes. X
Extra bright light. Length 400 mm.

10825-01 Spare lamp (not shown)

X
10825-02 Test light Length 500 mm
Extension tube connector

10270-00 80-amp ammeter


Small, handy device for the mounting or
insertion into the vehicle fuse.
A short circuit destroys the fuse and a
measurement is normally no longer possible.
Things are different with the ammeter. The fuse is
"bypassed" and the current strength becomes
visible on the display and is compared with the
max. values of the fuse.
This allows detecting and
comparing any malfunction.
Max. voltage 48 volts
Max. current strength 80 amps
Screen
Charge and fuse hold mode
DCA zero position for precise measurement
2 adapters for flat fuse with small and standard
motor vehicle contacts.

10271-00 Ammeter mini 20 amps


Device with almost the same
properties as the 80-amp device.
However, it must be used for smaller fuses
up to 20 amps
Max. voltage 48 V
Max. current strength 20 amps
Flat fuse and standard contacts
Mini 20-amp ammeter

10272-00 Device with almost the same


properties as the 80-amp device.
To be used, however, for smaller fuses
up to 20 amps
Max. voltage 48 V
Max. current strength 20 amps
Flat fuse and small contacts

10273-00 Current circuit tester


Wireless
- DC testing of 3 and 28 V
- No earth wire or clamps required
- visual and acoustic reaction backed by
vibration on contact with current-carrying
cables
- Computer safe for use near
sensitive engine controls
- incl. 2 long-term alkaline batteries
1/30
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES 1

Endoscopes
ECON TESTING DEVICES - ENGINE
10188-70 Endoscope with a 2-in-1
4.9-mm switch probe
The set includes 1 endoscope (Art. 10188-50) and
a 2-in-1, 4.9-mm switch probe.
The shaft includes two cameras (1 front and
1 side view) with two LED light sources;
thanks to an integrated switch, the front and
side view can be changed during the inspection.

Endoscope properties as in Art. 10188-50,


such as:
- Semi-rigid metal shaft, oil and scratch resistant
- Clear, high-resolution images, top quality
- Zoom 1.5x
- The image can be horizontally reflected
- through optimised white balance, the
image quality can be adjusted for all light
conditions

10188-00 Videoscope 5.5 mm


- Easy inspection - anytime, anywhere
- Removable, semi-rigid metal shaft
- Scratch as well as water, oil and fuel resistant
- Extra bright LED light source (0-275 lux / 6 cm)
with a combined dimmer
- Extra wide 3.5" TFT monitor
- Snapshot and video recording
- Innovative image reversal
- Memory card for 25,000 images or videos
- Video and USB connection for download
- Equipped with high performance battery
(4 hours of continuous use).
- Improved PCB, shaft connection and
suspension device, compact design.

- Shaft length 1 m
- 3 mirrors 70°, 90°, 110°

10188-40 Videoscope with a 2-in-1


4.9-mm switch probe
The set includes 1 endoscope (Art. 10188-00) and
a 2-in-1, 4.9-mm switch probe.
The shaft includes two cameras (1 front and
1 side view) with two LED light sources;
thanks to an integrated switch, the front and
side view can be changed during the inspection.
Endoscope properties as in Art. 10188-00,
such as:
- Removable, semi-rigid metal shaft
- Scratch, water, oil and fuel resistant
- Extra wide 3.5" TFT monitor
- Snapshot and video recording
- Innovative image reversal
- Memory card for 25,000 images or videos
- Video and USB connection for download
- Equipped with high performance battery

1/21
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
1 DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES
fault readout
Diagnostic

TESTING DEVICES - ENGINE ECON

MEMOBIKE 6050
DIAGNOSE- UND FEHLERAUSLESEGERÄT
Kompakter, leicht zu bedienender Diagnosetester für Motorräder, Roller und ATVs/Quads.
Jederzeit sichere und störungsfreie Verbindung zum Fahrzeug. In Punkto Schnelligkeit der
Diagnose und Handling jeder am Markt befindlichen, PC-basierten Lösung, überlegen.

• 45 Marken/Hersteller, nach Bedarf des Kunden auch frei wählbar und einzeln
programmierbar (Preisvorteil).
• Einmalige Datenbank von über 8.000 verschiedenen Fahrzeugvarianten und zu
prüfenden Systemen beginnend 1993!
• Jederzeit individuelle Beratung durch den Geräteentwickler und sorgfältige Auswahl der
tatsächlich benötigten Fahrzeug-Diagnosekabel vor dem Kauf.

Eigenschaften des MEMOBIKE-Profi-Testers


• Hochauflösendes LCD-Farbdisplay
• Neuentwicklung mit schnellem Prozessor
(zukunftssicher)
• Langlebiger Lithium Polymer Akku im Gerät
• Schnelle Software Updates über USB/Internet
• Drucken und Speichern von Prüfergebnissen
• Intuitive selbsterklärende geführte Bedienung
• Leicht verständliche Bedienungsanleitung
• Kompakter hochwertiger Koffer für Tester und Kabel
• Erweiterbar zum Synchronisiergerät mit digitaler
Anzeige

Arbeiten an folgenden Fahrzeug-Diagnosesystemen:


Zündung, Einspritzung, Wegfahrsperre/Alarm, ABS,
Instrumente, CAN BUS, Getriebe, Servolenkung, Fahrwerk,
Parkbremse, TPMS, Service-Reset, Radio.
Profi-Fehlerdiagnose und Ansteueroptionen diverser Bauteile
sowie zahlreiche Einstellmöglichkeiten.
Echtzeit auch in graphischer Darstellung

1/32
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES 1

Diagnostic fault
readout
TESTING DEVICES - ENGINE
ECON

10206-80 DIVAS Synchronizer


and Dynamic Vacuum Measurement
Supplementary set / accessories for the MEMOBIKE 6050
Diagnosetester for motorcycles, scooters and ATVs / quads.
The ideal extension of your 6050 diagnostic tester,
comparative analysis of measured analog values
and the displayed values in the control unit.
Synchronization for carburettor and injection engines,
precise analysis of intake pressures,
Graphical representation with changing colors and
simultaneous real-time measurement of engine
speed.
Characteristics:
• Synchronization of throttle valves (4
channels maximum)
• Dynamic pressure analysis of
the inlet ducts
• Tightness analysis of valves
and pistons
• Digital synchronization and
diagnostic functions combined
• 3 analog inputs for data acquisition
on vehicle sensors
• Real-time monitoring and
storage of measured data
• Built-in microphone

1/33
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
1 DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES
Brake fluids
information
valuable

BRAKE FLUIDS - VALUABLE INFORMATION


ECON

Valuable information on the subject of brake fluids!


Commercially available brake fluids are clearly marked. The requirements on them are established
by the American DOT (Department of Transportation) or the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE)
in the well-known DOT and SAE classes.
The American safety standard FMVSS 116 (Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard) is currently used
for quality indication by all manufacturers. The corresponding European standard is DIN/ISO 4925.

In plain language: The brake fluids available for sale, regardless of their sales designation, have a
common feature: the division into DOT 3, DOT 4 and derivatives (such as
DOT 4plus, Super DOT4) as well as DOT 5 and DOT 5.1

FMVSS FMVSS FMVSS


Safety standard
116 116 116
Specification SAE J DOT 3 DOT 4 ISO 4925 ISO 4925 DOT 5.1
1703 SAE J Class 4 Class 6 ISO 4925
1704 Class 5-1

Boiling point 205 °C


³ 205 °C
³ 230 °C
³ 230 °C
³ 250 °C
³ 260 °C
³

Wet boiling point 140 °C


³ 140 °C
³ 155 °C
³ 155 °C
³ 165 °C
³ 180 °C
³
Viscosity, mm²/s 1800
£ 1500
£ 1800
£ 1500
£ 750
£ 900
£
at -40 °C

Different specifications and their properties: not all standardised glycol fluids are FMVSS-certified
(the DOT fluids relevant in this country are printed in bold)

_1
°C Brake fluid measuring instruments indicating
250 water content according to the "traffic light
system" are to be applied with a sense of
200
Dot 5
proportion: a 4% water content can become
150 a danger in a DOT 3 fluid, while many DOT 4
Dot 4 fluids with a 4% water content still have a
100
Dot 3 significantly higher boiling point!
50 Dot = Department of transport
(Amerikanisches Transportministerium) In addition, first and foremost in brake fluids,
Water content the manufacturer's specifications must be
the top priority.
The boiling point of the three DOT classes decreases
differently with increasing water content

The change interval depends indeed on the water content, though replacement should in principle
occur every 2 years. This ensures rubber parts a long life and prevents rust buildup in brake cylinders
and callipers.
An unmistakable sign is the fluid colour: the darker, the older.

1/34
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES 1

Testing devices
systems
Brake
ECON
TESTING DEVICES - BRAKE SYSTEMS

10138-20 Brake fluid tester EBT 03


Electronic brake fluid tester for
different types of brake fluid such as
DOT 3, DOT 4, DOT 4Plus and DOT 5.1.
The device is menu driven and displays the
measurement result in the form of boiling
temperature (in °C) and water content (in%).
Features:
- processor controlled
- with two-line, alphanumeric LCD display
- automatic start of measurement on
insertion of the sensor
- Low-batt display
- automatic switch-off after
2 minutes without measurement
- voltage supply via 9 V block battery
(not included in the scope of delivery)

10138-10 Brake fluid tester EBT 06


Electronic brake fluid tester with
membrane keyboard for brake fluids
DOT 3, DOT 4 and DOT 5.1.
The percentage of water content is
displayed by 10 LEDs.
Features:
- separate TEST button for DOT 3,
DOT 4 and DOT 5.1
- V-steel sturdy probe
- automatic shutdown
- Low-batt display
- LED for faulty sensors
- voltage supply via 9 V block battery
(not included in the scope of delivery)
Display of results:
green: brake fluid OK
yellow: change brake fluid soon
red : change brake fluid immediately

10138-05 Pocket brake fluid tester


for quick test
- Integrated switching circuits measure the moisture
content of the fluid by measuring the electrical
resistance and subsequently comparing this
value with the permissible limit values
- Easy re-calibration with water
- 3 LED displays (green = < 1.5% OK /
yellow = 1.5% to 3% / red = > 3% impermissible)
- A red LED warns when battery is low
- 1.5 V AAA battery included

10138-30 Brake fluid tester


- DOT 3, 4, 5
- Specifically designed to reduce the moisture content in
the brake fluid to be tested
- Comparative electrolyte tester, which sends current through
the fluid and then measures resistance
- Simple to calibrate, very easy to use
- Audible test cycle with four LED displays
- Adjustable probe for easy access (180° rotatable).

1/35
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
1
Testing devices
Brake systems DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES

TESTING DEVICES - BRAKE SYSTEMS ECON

Brake bleeding device


Rotary joint
10307-00
Mityvac
- Operation with compressed air for strong negative pressure (vacuum)
- Integrated collecting container for fluids up to 1.8 l
Thumb controllable throttle with variable Fine mesh filter/
fog filter
flow check
- swivelling air supply unit with quick disconnect coupling
- quick disconnect coupling for accessories
- silent, insulated outlet
- automatic overflow control

Device with a special


"fog filter" on the
air exhaust

10141-00 Brake bleeder


New Brake Bleeding Kit - Import mode
- For one-man operation
Modell - For quick and effective brake bleeding
- 500-ml container with overflow valve
- Push button with latch for quick
bleeding
- Universal bleed screw fitting piece
made of rubber
- 500-mm bleed hose
- Practical suspension hook
- It operates with compressed air

10141-10 Brake bleeder


Import Model

Scope:
Vacuum brake bleeder 1 l
Double support with rubber adapters
for motorcycle brake bleeding.

10141-20 Universal brake


bleeding adapter

10141-25 Hose line (2 pcs)

1/36
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES 1

Testing devices
systems
Brake
TESTING DEVICES - BRAKE SYSTEMS
ECON
1 2
11
Brake service device for maintenance and leak test
as well as brake systems suction, especially with

Fig. 12-volt device


ABS brake systems. The connection to the brake 10 3
system occurs in the brake fluid reservoir of the
master brake cylinder. The fluid is pumped into
the brake system with preset pressure and drained
on the callipers by means of an adapter.

Delivered without adapter


10313-00 Brake service device 4

BSG-EC-12V
Voltage supply 12 V/DC 5
(Plug for cigar lighter)
Container capacity up to 5 l
9
10313-01 Brake service device 8
BSG-EC-230V 7
Voltage supply 230 V/DC
Container capacity up to 5 l

10313-02 Brake service device 6


BSG-EC-230V with trolley
Voltage supply 230 V/DC 1 Suction hose 7 Switch ON/OFF
Container capacity up to 20 l

Fig. with trolley and 12-volt device


2 Return hose 8 START button
10313-03 Brake service device
BSG-EC-230V with trolley
3 Voltage supply 9 Filling hose

and extraction device 4 Pressure controller10 Quick coupling

Extraction device
Filling hose
Voltage supply 230 V/DC
5 Manometer
Container capacity up to 20 l
Measuring range 11 Trough for
0...4 bar brake fluid
10314-00 Adapter set SUZUKI original container
6 Fuse max. 5 l
for the brake fluid reservoir, consisting of 4 lids
with matching seal and plug connection
(please request list of models); for tightening, the
original screws are used

10314-10 Adapter set YAMAHA


for the brake fluid reservoir, consisting of 7 lids
with matching seal and plug connection; for
tightening, the original screws are used

10314-11 Adapter Set HONDA


for the brake fluid reservoir, consisting of 6 lids
with matching seal and plug connection;
tightening, the original screws are used

10314-12 Adapter Set KTM


for the brake fluid reservoir, consisting of 9 lids
with matching seal and plug connection; for
tightening, the original screws are used

10314-13 Adapter Set BMW


for the brake fluid reservoir, consisting of 3 lids
with matching seal and plug connection; for
tightening, the original screws are used

10314-14 Adapter Set Piaggio


for the brake fluid reservoir, consisting of 5 lids
with matching seal and plug connection; for
tightening, the original screws are used
1/37
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
1 DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES
Brake fluids
information
valuable

BRAKE FLUIDS - VALUABLE INFORMATION


ECON

Metal version
10153-00 Pressure and vacuum
hand pump
- Pressure and vacuum hand pump made of
metal, switchable
- Pressure 0 - 4,0 bar
- Negative pressure -1.0 - 0 bar
- Fluorosilicone internal valves, resistant
against fluids
- One-hand operation
- Petrol and oil resistant
- Incl. hoses, adapters, collecting container and
carrying case
Examples of use:
- Fork suction, injection pump,
Central locking system of the
fuel pressure regulator, exhaust valve,
brake booster
- Brake bleeding

10164-10 Vacuum Pump and


Brake Bleeder
• for checking the components of the vacuum system
e.g. MAP sensors, valves, hoses, etc.
• also suitable for bleeding brakes and clutch systems
• includes connecting hoses, bleeding bottle,
hose connector / adapter
• max. vacuum: -0.7 bar / -10 psi

10139-30 Refractometer
Backlit for easy reading,
even in dark locations.

For testing:
- Coolants from 0 to -50 C
- Batteries from 1.1 to 1.4 kg/l
- Screenwash from 0 to -40 C
- AdBlue scale from 30 to 35%

10152-00 Suction device for


fork oil
Simple and effective suction for the oil level of the
fork. The fork itself is filled with a little more fork oil
than prescribed. The suction pipe is adjusted according
to specification and fitted on the fork.
Excess oil is suctioned with an oil syringe so that the oil
level in both suction pipes is absolutely the same.

1/38
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES 1

circuit devices
Cooling
COOLING CIRCUIT DEVICES
ECON

10167-00 Motorcycle cooler tester


Cooler test combination for motorcycles, usable
for European and Asian motorcycles.
For space reasons, the set has been especially
provided with an angle adapter with
extension hose.

Supply of delivery:
- 1 cooling system tester
- 1 angle adapter KW 90 (for the application area, please see table)
- Delivered in a case. Motorcycle type Cooler adapter denomination

With the help of the cooling system tester, pressure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7


is generated in the cooling system. If the pressure Aprilia
drops, a leak in the cooling system must be expected. BMW
If the pointer position of the manometer remains
Ducati
unchanged, the cooling system is functioning correctly.
Harley-Davidson
10167-03 KW 60 Angle adapter 1 Honda
Kawasaki
10167-04 KW 23 Angle adapter 2 Suzuki
10167-05 KW 11 Angle adapter 3 Triumph
Yamaha
10167-06 KW 31 Angle adapter 4 KTM
10167-07 KW 10 Angle adapter 5 Roller
Honda Helix 250
10167-08 KW 92 Angle adapter 6 Italjet
10167-09 KW 90 Angle adapter 7 Piaggio

10167-02 Test adapter for


Cooler lid
Suitable for almost all
cooler lids - custom-made design possible.

10169-00 Cylinder head


leak tester
Leak tester for gases bound in the water cycle
such as CO2. Through a leaking head gasket,
the combustion gas enters the water cycle.

The cooler fluid is suctioned with the rubber


squeeze bulb of the tester. The poured-in test
fluid changes colour from blue to yellow if a
leak is present.

An easy and accurate diagnosis is therefore


possible.

10169-10 Spare reaction liquid

1/39
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
1
cleaning and
DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES
Carburettor

CARBURETTOR CLEANING
injection

AND INJECTION ECON

10407-00 Diagnostic rack


StandMate
E
The perfect helper for adjustment and
service work. MAD
For IgnitionMate, VacuumMate, BY
SynchroMate.
N
- Fuel bottle with hose + petcock
- Adjustable device shelf
ECO
- StandMate with casters
- Delivered as a kit

Individual shelves on request.

Spare part
10407-01 1.5-l petrol bottle
with cock and petrol hose

Hose disconnect device


Plastic
10145-00 Ø up to 16 mm
10146-00 Ø up to 28 mm
10147-00 Ø up to 13 - 57 mm 3-piece Locking ring

80616-00 Jet reamer set


16 pcs with interchangeable grip with quiver
0.33 – 2.0 mm Reamers

80616-50 Jet reamer set Metal


12 pcs with interchangeable grip with quiver interchangeable grip
0.6 – 1.4 mm

80617-00 Jet reamer set


6-piece with fixed grip 0.4 – 1.4 mm,
in a self-service case

80614-00 Jet gauges Vernier gauge reading

with vernier gauge reading 0 - 3 mm


80615-00 with vernier gauge reading 0 - 5 mm

1/40
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES 1

for the ultrasonic


Accessories
cleaner
ACCESSORIES FOR THE
ECON ULTRASONIC CLEANER

80863-10 Carburetor Adjustment Set


• 10 pcs.
• To adjust the carburetor mixed or synchronization screw

• Angled 90 °
• Available sizes:
5mmx4mm long, 5mmx10mm long
5mmx19mm long, 5mmx42mm long
5mmx78mm long, 2x18mm long
2x40mm long

80863-20 Carburetor Screwdriver


with Shaft
• facilitates the adjustment of carburetor kits,
particularly suitable for work in tight spaces
such as motorcycles
• suitable for slotted screws
• slot size: 1 x 5 mm
• adjustable depth stop 0 - 5.5 mm
marked, lockable knurled sleeve
for detecting the rotational range
• length: 470 mm

80863-30 Cranked Wrench Key


• length: 480 mm
• includes:
• changing head with 6.3-1/4 mm clamping holder
• clip-on handle
• bit is moved by turning the handle

80900-00 Carburettor holder


So as to perform professional work on carburettors
the carburettor holder should be available in
every workshop.
This tool makes it easy to disassemble or adjust a
carburettor.
The float gauge levels of multiple carburettor systems
can be easily adjusted. All important parts are easily
accessible, so many assembly defects can be avoided.
Petrol runs into the catch basin, which can be separately
removed. The carburettor system can be turned
by 360°; the replaceable Teflon jaws protect the
carburettor housing.

MADE BY ECON

CLEANING CARBURERS
AND INJECTION
Ultrasonic cleaners and
accessories can be found
1/41 in section 6!
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
1
Petrol delivery DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES

PETROL DELIVERY ECON

60163-00 Fluid pump


Petrol has become very expensive.
Its price increases daily.
Keep everything - "collecting" is worthwhile.
Wherever possible, pump out.
Drum with filling level indicator.
A1 approval for interim storage.

60164-00 Transfer and emergency pump


For various fluids, petrol and oil resistant,
hose length approx. 2 m

60164-10 Fuel injection


• Transparent design for the visibility of the liquid
• Suitable for the aspiration and delivery
of petrol or diesel from filter ...
• Rotating shutdown
• 1.5 l capacity

60160-60 120-l petrol drum


Petrol has become very expensive.
Its price increases daily.
Keep everything - "collecting" is worthwhile.
Wherever possible, pump out.
Drum with filling level indicator.
A1 approval for interim storage.

Drum without pumping device

60167-00 Fuel suction and


transfer pump
- to empty the tank after a mistake committed during
filling (petrol instead of diesel) or to remove a
submerged fuel pump during body work,
adjust or read the fuel supply unit,
clean the container...
- mobile 40-l containers (on wheels) (tank and
petrol lines can be completely
emptied)
- clean intake and thrust thanks to
the pneumatic gearbox
Delivery inclusive of anti-static earth cable,
anti-overflow hose and 3 fuel probes
- Emptying via injection lines, the
tank filler neck or fuel lines
1/42
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
Exhaust gas
1

valuable
information

Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES

EXHAUST GAS VALUABLE INFORMATION

CO: Carbon monoxide is odourless and colourless and


Euro 1 13,0g extremely toxic. Through the formation of carbon deposits
in the combustion chamber and on the spark plug electrodes,
Euro 2 5,5g it also causes mechanical damage to the engine.
CO measurement is the only method available
to check the optimum operation of petrol injection engines.
Euro 3 2,0g

The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Gas properties:
PKW-
2,3g
Euro 3
Cok: Pure carbon CO is calculated according to the
PKW-
1,0g formula COk = 15 x CO/(CO+CO2).
Euro 4 Carbon monoxide CO
C02:The higher the percentage of carbon dioxide in
Gas properties

Euro 1 3,0g relation to the percentage of CO, the more efficient


the combustion. The value should be above 10%.
Euro 2 1,2g HC unburnt hydrocarbon: The HC value
helps to adjust the correct combustion level for
Euro 3 0,3g each cylinder. Unburnt hydrocarbons are
synonymous with waste of energy. A minimal
PKW- HC value means that the engine is perfectly tuned.
0,2g
Euro 3
PKW- 02 Oxygen: The lower the 02 value, the more effective
0,1g the combustion. A value of more than 2% indicates a
Euro 4 Hydrocarbons HC
malfunction of the engine..
Euro 1 0,3g
Nox: Nitrogen changes into oxygen through the combustion
of nitrogen at high temperatures. A high
combustion temperature helps to minimise the emission of
Euro 2 0,3g HC. Basically, the higher the NOx,
the better the combustion. (>200 ppm).
Euro 3 0,1g
Lambda: the proportion of the air actually consumed
ECON

PKW- during combustion, in contrast to the


0,15g
Euro 3 theoretical ideal amount of air supply.
PKW- A lambda value of 1.0 is theoretically ideal.
0,08g Lambda < 1.0 indicates that the mixture is too rich,
Euro 4 Nitrogen oxides NOx
Lambda > 1.0 that the mixture is too lean.

1/43
1
gas analysis
DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES
Exhaust

EXHAUST GAS ANALYSIS


ECON

10200-50 Exhaust gas analyser AUK


ECON EGA 4-gas tester
Very small and handy 4 gas tester.
AUK APPROVAL!

Handheld device in an impact-resistant jacket.


Device with exhaust gas probe, pre-filter, intake pipe.
OIML1 accuracy class, insensitive to
high HC values.

Very easy to use, self-explanatory menu.


The device is ideal for complete diagnostics and
implementation of AUK.
Features:
• AUK approval
• 4 gas tester
• suitability for a complete exhaust gas analysis.
• handheld, portable device
• internal power supply (battery)
• European quality mark
• ECON service, maintenance and gauging, annually
• no additional exhaust adaptation required any longer
• simple, self-explanatory handling
• top price
• printer (optional)
• speed recording unit (optional)
• temperature probe (optional)

10200-60 Infrared printer


for 4-gas AUK tester

10200-20 Abgastester
ECON EGAplus
Battery life at least 4 hours charger and 12V
cable connection
uncalibrated exhaust

Very compact and robust


Very short warm-up time - less than 2 minutes
Optimum for exhaust gas measurement with
motorcycles Fuel selection: LPG, natural gas,
gas analyzer!

petrol or diesel
Multilingual menu guidance

Technical specifications:
Interfaces: Bluetooth, RS232 connector Scope of Delivery
Dimensions: 220 x 55 x 120 mm • Exhaust gas analyzer (4 gas)
Weight: 1 kg • Rubber protective cover
• Special sampling probe for
Measuring range: Forklift trucks, motorcycles or
CO (0-10%) motor vehicles
CO² (0-16%) • power adapter
HC (0-10,000 ppm propane) • Replacement filter
O² (0-21%) • Instructions for use
Alpha Lambda (0.8-1.2) • suitcase
1/44
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES 1

Headlamp/
LED lights
ECON HEADLAMP/LED LIGHTS

Headlamp
10149-00 Adjustment device
With luxmeter type 40.
Type approval no. TP8-S31.
A sturdy, inexpensive precision device especially
designed for rough workshop operations.
The height-adjustable visor allows
the quick calibration of the device on the vehicle.
Easy height adjustment of the optical housing
by spring action.
Housing spirit level for footprint control.

It must be present if the general inspection


is carried out in your workshop!
10826-10 COB LED Working Light
• with the latest COB LED technology COB = chip on board
• 4x brighter than standard LED lamps
• perfectly even and bright light
• with hanging hook
• comfortable swivel anti-slip handle
• Lithium-Ion battery, 3.7V / 2200 mAh, for faster charging
• incl. AC main charger and 12V adaptor cable
• dimensions: 182 x 55 x 35 mm

10826-15 LED Working Lamp


• very handy and fits into any small pocket
• always ready for quick checks
• very good lighting by 36 bright LED's and
reflector LED in the lamp head
• with magnet and strap
• dimensions: 225 x (oval 30 x 35) mm

10826-20 LED Flashlight


• Lamp housing made of ABS
• Polycarbonate lens
• Magnetic pocket clip
• New lighting chip
• Incl. 3 pcs. AAA batteries

10827-00 LED work lamp


with spot light - very bright
rechargeable
Rechargeable batteries and
charger included

Spot light

Magnetic
1/45 with surface protection
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
1
measurement DIAGNOSTIC AND TESTING DEVICES

TRACK MEASUREMENT
track

ECON

Professional laser tool


Laser frame and track measurement safety as well as driving comfort take
priority.

The laser is mounted quickly and pays off fast.

Advantages:
• Profitable use (€ 30 - 50 per measurement),
quick and easy handling
• Low investment costs
• No follow-up costs for updates, etc.
• An employee can assess and document the chassis condition
in 2-3 minutes.
• The measuring protocol makes diagnostic work understandable.
• Protocol for the customer and the insurance appraiser
• Document for estimates
• Claim settlement as a service to customers
• Accurate evaluation of a used vehicle

10850-00 Motorcycles 15 - 21"


for motorcycles with normal chassis clearance

10860-00 Motorcycles 15 - 21"


for all motorcycles and
custom-bike manufacturers

10870-00 ATV / Quad 8 - 15"

10880-00 Scooter 10 - 17"

Accessories and other versions on request!


1/46
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
ECON TYRE SERVICE 2

changers
TYRE CHANGERS

Tyre
20153-60 Tyre changer
ECON ETT M32BA
• Tire changer with 90° swinging arm
S
S
in Motorcycle execution (consisting of tyre fitting machine,
motorbike claw set and motorcycle dusting paddle)
W
E
• New warp-resistant construction with high precise
Laser cut manufacturing
I
M
• High resistant powder coating with
hammer painting design
N
I
• Self-centering 4-clamping-jaws system with 2 double-acting
aluminum clamping cylinders
G
-
• Double acting aluminum bead breaking cylinder and
bead breaker on the side with anti stuck system
I
A
• Front extractable pedal assembly with aluminum valves and
ergonomically arranged pedal control
N
U Technical data
G
T Wheel diameter max.: 980 mm

O
Gear width:
Bead breaking range:
280 mm
85 – 330 mm
A
M Bead breaker force: 2.800 kg R
Mounting speeds: 7 U/min
A Operating pressure: 8 – 12 bar M
Power supply voltage : (3 ~) 400 V / 50 Hz
T Driving power:
Weight:
0,75 kW
210 kg
I
Clamping Range
C Motorcycle Machine
Stage 1
Stage 1: 8 - 19"
Stage 2: 12 - 23"
Machine Stage 2
Stage 1: 10 - 21"
Stage 2: 14 - 25"

Y CLE
RC
O T O
+ M
C AR

2/01
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
2 TYRE SERVICE
ECON
changers

TYRE CHANGERS
Tyre

ns
20154-10 Tyre changer r o ptio
e
ECON ETT M52BA o r f urth ur
F for o gers,
F • Tire changer with pneumatically tilting mounting tower
r e c han page 3!
in Motorcycle execution (consisting of tyre fitting machine,
ty o
U motorbike claw set and motorcycle dusting paddle)
e r e fer t
s
• New warp-resistant construction with
plea
L high precise Laser cut manufacturing
• High resistant powder coating with
L hammer painting design
• Pneumatically mounting head clamping with
Y adjustable automatic horizontal and vertical distance control
• Self-centering 4-clamping-jaws system with 2 double-acting
aluminum clamping cylinders
• Double acting aluminum bead breaking cylinder and
A bead breaker on the side with anti stuck system
• Front extractable pedal assembly with aluminum valves and
U ergonomically arranged pedal control
T Technical Data
O Wheel diameter max.: 1.050 mm
M Gear width: 280 mm
Bead breaking range: 85 – 330 mm
A Bead breaker force: 2.800 kg
Mounting speeds: 7 U/min
T Operating pressure: 8 – 12 bar
I Power supply voltage : (3 ~) 400 V / 50 Hz
Driving power: 0,75 kW
C Weight: 240 kg
Clamping Range
Motorcycle Machine
Stage 1
Stage 1: 8 - 19"
Stage 2: 12 - 23"
Machine Stage 2
Stage 1: 10 - 21"
Stage 2: 14 - 25"

2/02
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
ECON TYRE SERVICE 2

changers
TYRE CHANGERS

Tyre
20153-65 Assist arm left
ECON ETT A30
• Pneumatic assist arm
(left)
• To retrofit the tire changers ETT A30
Montiermaschine ATH M32
• Compressed air connection. 10 bar

20154-15 Assist arm right


ECON ETT A34
• Pneumatic assist arm (right)
• To retrofit the tire changers
Montiermaschine ATH M52
• One beading roll pneumatically fixable
• Compressed air connection. 10 bar

ETT A34

20154-16 Assist arm left


ECON ETT A31
• Pneumatic assist arm
(left)
• To retrofit the tire changers ETT A31
Montiermaschine ATH M52
• Compressed air connection. 10 bar

20153-20 Small mounting head


for small wheel diameters
e.g. scooters or quads

20153-50 Plastic
mounting head
Standard

2/03
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
2 TYRE SERVICE
ECON
changers
Tyre

TYRE CHANGERS

20108-00 Hold-down for tyres


A must during mounting.
The "third hand." With this simple,
ool made of plastic, the tyre fitter can hold the
tyre in the rim base without
risking getting injured im Felgenbett halten.
Damage-free and easy mounting is guaranteed.
A must on every tyre changer.

20108-10 Tyre-down holder


• Simplify drawing the tyre on to the rim
• Measurement: 290 x 150 x 50 m
• Material: 30% Fiberglas

20190-00 Bead breaker for


quad tyres
This simple tool makes quad tyres
marking a child's play thanks to its
hydraulic system.
Adjustable for different rim widths.
Height adjustment

20191-00 Edge Protection-Set


• 150 m
• Prevents damage to the rim during tire mounting
• Suitable for motorcycle and passenger car rims
• with cord to prevent loss

2/04
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior
notice.
ECON TYRE SERVICE 2

maschinen
Wucht-
BALANCING MACHINES

20103-40 Wheel balancer


ETT-W22
• Wheel balancer for passenger cars, vans and motorcycles
(mit optionaler Spannvorrichtung) und LLKW-Räder
• High resistant powder coating with hammer painting design
• Electric motor with opto-ride technique
• Controlled by microprocessor with 3 LED – Displays
• Laser and LED positioning of weights and on-screen
display (LPS)
• Program choice: static, dynamic, aluminum programs,
aluminum weight optimizing incl. split-program
• Wheel protecting with automatic start –stop function
• Integrated light inside the wheel
• Ergonomically arranged front panel and
big counter weights holder
• Balancing shaft and quick nut with
a diameter of 40mm
• Centering cones between 44 and 133mm diameters

Technical Data - basic machine


Ø max. diameter of
centre bore diameter: 44 - 174 mm Lieferumfang:
Measuring time: 7s • Maschine in
Tolerance of measure: 1g Grundausstattung
Display (LED, LCD ,TFT): LED • Schnellspannmutter
Rim width max.: 11,5 - 20 " • diverse Konen
Rim diameter max.: • Felgenbreiten-Lehre
13 - 24 "
Wheel weight max.: 65 kg • Gewichtezange
Weight: 118 kg

Motorcycle tensioning devices on page 2/06

2/05
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
2 TYRE SERVICE
ECON
maschinen
Wucht-

BALANCING MACHINES

The motorcycle clamping device ProBike as well as the numerous accessories allow
the static and dynamic balancing of motorcycles.
• Safe and easy to handle
• Easy and quick assembly
• Modular expansion options
• Extended clamping range for stretch
of scooter tyre from 10 inches
without additional jaws

20103-11 ProBike clamping device


ETT-ECO
This module represents the entry into the
ProBike version. It consists of the ProBike
driver wing incl. Chuck, a 14 mm
motorcycle shaft,
2 centering cones, 6 spacer sleeves.

20103-12 ProBike clamping device


ETT-Standard
With the ProBike Modul Standard, you
are well equipped to balance a variety of
motorcycle wheels.
• Motorcycle centering shaft Ø 14 mm
• centering sleeve 14 - 28 mm
• distance bush
• Centering cones
• quick-release unit QuickFix for Ø 14 mm
• Blackboard Standard

20103-13 ProBike Extension


ETT-Profi
• Motorcycle centering shaft Ø 19 mm
• centering sleeve bis 35 mm
• Special centering sets for motorcycles
with swinging arm
• quick-release unit
QuickFix for Ø 19 mm
• Blackboard Profi

2/06
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
ECON TYRE SERVICE 2

Balancing
machines
BALANCING MACHINES

20101-00 Balancing machine


K 22 Bike manual
Balancing machine for hand drive
Extremely easy, fast and precise balancing.
The wheel is easy inserted on the supplied shaft
and tightened with clamping cones.
It is manually driven. After push starting,
the display shows how heavy the
weight should be. By slowly rotating,
the row of LEDs lights up completely
at the point where the weight must be applied. Only
the rim diameter and width must
still be entered. Connection 230 volts

20102-00 Balancing machine


K 22 Bike E-drive
The K 22 unit facilitates work and reduces
balancing times. The wheel rotates on its own
bearings, thus ensuring perfect balancing. The
wheel is driven via a roller from the outside.
- Faster clamping of the wheels
- automatic detection of the diameter
- automatic detection of the wheelbase
- high accuracy of measurement
- quick evaluation
- different measuring programmes
- the position of the weights can be predefined
- 10" - 21" wheel size without reclamping possible
- less than 16" with manual drive
- adapter (optional) for all wheels without their own
bearing (single-sided swing arm)

Wheel drive
roller
(E-drive)

20102-01 Adapter kit K 22 Bike


for wheel single-sided
swing arm

2/07
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior
notice.
2 TYRE SERVICE
ECON
maschinen
Wucht-

BALANCING MACHINES

N E W
BikeBoss
• First motorcycle wheel balancer that
allows dynamic balancing starting from a
wheel width of 3"
• Menu guided work steps with special soft touch
potentiometer/operation
• Clearly structured display
• Plenty of space for accessories
• Easy and flexible manual operation
• Fast wheel mounting on the lift with easy
lever mechanism
• Ergonomic work station for professional
motorcycle wheel balancing
• Optionally with convenient base cabinet for
even more storage space
20102-20 BikeBoss Standard
inclusive
• 15 mm centering shaft
• 17 mm centering shaft Technical data Technische Daten
• 19,05 mm centering shaft Shaft diameter: Ø 15, 17 und 19,05 mm
• Clamping material Wheel diameter max.: 12 - 21 Zoll
20102-25 BikeBoss Profi Wheel width: 400 mm (ca. 15,5 Zoll)
Width / depth: 1.131 mm / 672 mm
inclusive
• 15 mm centering shaft
• 17 mm centering shaft
• 19,05 mm centering shaft
• Clamping material
• The BikeBoss balances motorcycle wheels
with single-sided swing-arm suspension
without any problems.

20102-30 BikeBoss base cabinet

2/8
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
ECON TYRE SERVICE 2

Balancing /
centring
BALANCING / CENTRING
20118-00 Balancing device (static)
Device intended for balancing
and centring
- Stable, dismountable version without shaft
- Professional version, used by all major
tyre companies and in international races
- Highly accurate manufacture
- Adjusting screws for accurate aligning
are included in the scope of delivery
- Smoothly running bearings guarantee a precise
balancing procedure.
- The accompanying Y wheel axle clamps facilitate
the insertion of the axle and wheel

Delivered as a set!
MADE BY ECON
20143-01 Balancing device and
Truing stand
Device as No. 20118-00, additionally provided
with a magnet measuring rod which is easily fixed
on the bottom plate so that a radial or lateral
run-out can be determined on the rim. The optional
taper shaft is blocked by the locking rings so that
the shaft cannot move laterally.
Measuring rods and dial gauge included.

20119-00 Balancing and


centering stands
• Centering, balancing wheels and checking
the bearings

NEW
• Stable frame ensures accurate centering
and balancing
• Rim widths up to 5.0 inches, rim sizes up
to 23 inches
• Foldable design that saves space
• Wheels with bearing inside diameter of
more than 15mm

20120-00 Truing stand ECON


For controlling and processing
radial and lateral run-outs.

For up to 180-mm-wide rims.

A robust, simple and practical


device from the USA.

The truing stand is delivered as a set.

2/09
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
2
Balancing /
TYRE SERVICE
ECON
centring

BALANCING / CENTRING
Step cone 5 mm deep
16/18/20/22/24/26/28/30/32 mm
20144-10 Graded taper shaft Adjusting wheel with clamping
To finally have a professional taper shaft that is
Shaft Ø 14 mm
inserted into the wheel bearings and sits steadilly
Length 400 mm
without wobbling.
Basic shaft 14 mm, cone right and left with
16 mm (smallest diameter), nine gradations
in 2-mm intervals up to 32 mm.
The taper shaft is inserted right and left into the
wheel bearing and the clamping screw
tightened - that's all.

Locking rings
20144-00 Balancing shaft with cone
for small bearing diameters,
e.g. 125cc scooter or moped
- Shaft ø 10 mm
- 12 - 30 mm cone
- Length 390 mm

Balancing shaft for balancing stand


20142-00 ø 14 mm

20141-00 ø 15 mm

20140-00 ø 17 mm

20139-00 ø 20 mm

20117-00 Balancing set for


Piaggio X9
The set consists of an axle shaft (Ø 15 mm) and an
adapter for front and rear tyres (the adapter must
be used only with taper shaft)

2/10
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
ECON TYRE SERVICE 2

Balancing /
centring
BALANCING / CENTRING

Balancing adapter for single-


sided swing arm wheels
20104-01 BMW 3- + 4-hole rim
(14-mm shaft required)

20104-10 BMW 5-hole rim


BMW 5 hole
(14-mm shaft required) BMW 3+4 hole

20104-04 Ducati Ø 55 mm
(20 mm shaft required)

20104-08 Ducati Ø 55,9 mm


u.a. for 1098/S/Tricolore, Multistrada 1200(S)
(20 mm shaft required)

20104-21 Ducati for special rims


Ducati Ø 55 mm Ducati Ø 55,9 mm Ducati
Ø1-43,95 mm, Ø2-42,7 mm
(20 mm shaft required)

20104-12 Universal adapter


to be used for
- Honda VFR 750/800/1200
- Ducati
- MV Agusta
- Harley-Davidson
(to be used with 20144-10 taper shaft
not included in the scope of delivery)

20104-07 Harley-Davidson
(15 mmshaft required)

20104-03 Honda VFR 750 u. RC36


Ø 50 mm, (20 mm shaft required)
Harley-Davidson Honda VFR 750 Honda VFR 1200
20104-17 Honda VFR 1200
(20 mm shaft required)

20104-18 Honda CB 1000R


also for VFR 800 (20 mm shaft required)

20104-19 Honda VFR 1200X Crosstourer


(20 mm shaft required) Honda CB 1000R Honda VFR 1200X

20104-16 KTM Duke 1290


(20 mm shaft required)

20104-05 MV MF 4 Agusta
(20 mm shaft required)
KTM Duke 1290 MV Agusta

2/11
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
2 TYRE SERVICE
ECON
Zentrieren
Wuchten/

BALANCING / CENTRING
Balancing adapter for single-
sided swing arm wheels
20104-20 Peugeot Metropolis 400
(20 mm shaft required)

20104-15 Piaggio MP3


(20 mm shaft required)
Peugeot Metropolis Piaggio MP3

20104-06 Triumph
(20-mm shaft required)

20104-13 Additional adapter


for Triumph 5-hole
(to be used in conjunction with
the 20104-06 adapter)
Triumph Triumph Triumph Tiger
Additional adapter Explorer
20104-14 Triumph Tiger Explorer
(Welle 20 mm erforderlich)

80124-00 Magnetic rod


Seating for
The magnetic rod is simply fitted on the metal foot
dial gauge
of your balancing stand and adjusted in the proper
measuring position (with dial gauge).

Holding force 60 kg
Magnet
Suitable for use on balancing stand with metal plate. on / off

80117-00 Dial gauge


Dial gauge for use and clamping on
the magnetic rod.

Precise centring results.

Tyre marker
Cold surface marking on virtually any
surface and material. It holds permanently.

20145-22 White colour - P.U. = 2 markers

20145-23 Yellow colour - P.U. = 2 markers

2/12
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
ECON TYRE SERVICE 2

Accessories /
consumables
ACCESSORIES /
CONSUMABLES
Fitting lubricant
20160-00 1-kg bucket

20161-00 5-kg bucket


20161-50 5-kg bucket BLACK

20162-00 Talc for


tubular tyre mounting, 500-g can

20163-00 Brush
Angular shape brush to
apply fitting lubricant

20163-10 Brake calliper brush


Brass brush to remove
brake dust, even from the brake disc

20165-00 Motorcycle metal valve 1

20165-50 High-speed valve


2

20166-00 Short rubber valve (Alligator) 3 1 2 3

20166-01 Short rubber valve (Import)

20167-00 Long rubber valve (Alligator) 4

20167-01 Long rubber valve (Import)

20180-00 Rubber valve with 4


5 5
chrome sleeve
20181-00 Rubber valve
6
Angular shape
20181-05 Aluminium angled valve
7
Ø 8,3 mm
6
20181-06 Aluminium angled valve 7
7
Ø 11,3 mm
20181-03 Angled valve Schwarz 8
8,3 mm
Æ
20181-04 Angled valve Schwarz 8 8
11,3 mm
Æ
2/13
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
2 TYRE SERVICE ECON
Tools and
weights

TOOLS AND WEIGHTS

20109-00 Repair set


for tubeless tyres
Makeshift repairs on the go without
quality standards. For a slow and
careful drive to the nearest tyre dealer.

20107-50 Tyre lever


Chrome vanadium, 380 mm long, with replaceable
plastic protection to prevent scratch marks on
the rim surface

20107-51 Spare plastic 380 mm

20107-55 Tyre lever


500 mm long, otherwise as art. 20107-50

20107-56 Spare plastic 500 mm

20110-00 Spoke key and


spoke wrench

20169-00 Mounting tool MOTO


for valves
- Mounting lever for motorcycles
- A freewheel on the threaded piece allows
removing the valve after the insertion
without interfering spokes or brake discs

Rubber protection

20168-00 Mounting tool for


valves
Metal design with protective rubber

20176-00 Valve core screwdriver with magnet

20177-00 Valve core screwdriver without magnet

20177-50 Valve turner with


Torque limiting
to 0.25 NM and/or 0.45 NM.
This ensures a reliable fit and prevents
overtightening sensitive valves
2/14
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
ECON TYRE SERVICE 2

Tools and
weights
TOOLS AND WEIGHTS

80555-01 Spoke Torque


Wrench
• interchangeable heads
• rim life is extended by tightening all the spokes
with the same torque value
• 10 interchangeable heads with 12 x 9 mm square
drive, suitable for the most popular spoke sizes
• 5,1 - 5,8 - 6,1 - 6,3 - 6,4 - 6,5 -
6,7 - 6,9 mm
• ratchet head: 6.3 (1/4), 24-tooth, for sockets
• torque range: 3 - 15 Nm
• now with quick release button
• length: 195 mm

80555-00 Spoke key set


Mini Applications from 4.0 to 6.2 mm
(The set consists of a key pin and 8 adapters)

80556-00 Spoke key set


Maxi Applications from 5.4 to 6.8 mm

Ide
al
20178-50 Tread depth gauge for when
the to
wo urin
digital rks g a
ho nd
- 0 - 25 x 0.01 mm p
- mm/inch reading
- made of ABS plastic
- "0" switch
- On/Off switch

20179-00 Tyre pressure gauge


digital - flat head shape
Digitale display, BAR, PSI, kPA, kg/cm²,
Measurement range: 0,15 - 9,50 BAR

20179-10 Tyre pressure gauge


manual
• Scale 10 - 75 PSI, 0,5 - 5,5 kg/cm²
• made out of ABS

2/15
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
2
Werkzeuge/
TYRE SERVICE
ECON
Gewichte

TOOLS AND WEIGHTS

20173-10 Adhesive weight remover


• For removing adhesive weights on the rim or for
releasing glued protective strips
• width 19 mm, Length 225 mm
• Scraper blade can be sharpened
• Material: POM (Polyoxymethylen)

20105-00 Balancing tongs


Forceps to remove or force balancing
weights.

20106-00 Hammering tool


Tool for hammering weights on spoked wheels.
The weights are pressed around the spoke
through the cone in the tool.
Cone

Balancing weights
chromed
20133-00 5 g. - P.U. 5 pieces
20133-01 10 g. - P.U. 5 pieces
20133-02 15 g. - P.U. 5 pieces
20133-03 20 g. - P.U. 5 pieces

Soft lead weights


20170-01 10 g. - P.U. 10 pieces
20170-02 15 g. - P.U. 10 pieces
20170-03 20 g. - P.U. 10 pieces
20170-04 25 g. - P.U. 10 pieces
20170-05 30 g. - P.U. 10 pieces

2/16
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
ECON TYRE SERVICE 2

Tools and
weights
TOOLS AND WEIGHTS

re e
20173-00 Adhesive weights 12 x 2,5 g Lea df
P.U. 10 bars Single weights - no cutting!

20174-10 Adhesive weights 12 x 5 g f ree


e a d
P.U. 10 bars L
Single weights - no cutting!
20175-00 Adhesive weights
7 x 5 g + 6 x 2,5 g
P.U. 10 bars
20175-10 Adhesive weights
7 x 5 g + 6 x 2,5 g
P.U. 10 bars Chrome finish

20175-50 Adhesive weights stainless steel


polished, 4 x 10 g + 4 x 5 g
P.U. 10 bars

20175-20 Adhesive weights black


7 x 5 g + 6 x 2,5 g
P.U. 10 bars

20186-00 Adhesive weights black


12 x 5 g
P.U. 10 bars

Adhesive weights Moto


Description: 60-gram zinc glue seal, divided
into 12 x 5 gram sections. Thanks to
perforated tape, the segments can be
separated without tools. Overall height with
adhesive tape: 3,8mm Width: 19 mm
Length: 172 mm With Speedliner tape
technology for residue-free removal of the
weight.

20185-00 Chrome - P.U. 18 bars


20185-01 Black - P.U. 18 bars
20185-02 Orange - P.U. 18 bars
20185-03 Green - P.U. 18 bars
20185-04 Red - P.U. 18 bars
20185-05 White - P.U. 18 bars
20185-06 Yellow - P.U. 18 bars
20185-07 Silver - P.U. 18 bars
20185-08 Blue - P.U. 18 bars 2/17
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
2
Tyre racks
TYRE SERVICE
ECON
TYRE RACKS

40372-00 Tyre rack


Standard unit - galvanised
Height: 2.000 mm
Storage levels: 3
Width: ca. 1 mtr.
Loading capacity (level): 150 kg
Depth: 42 cm

40373-00 Tyre rack


Extension unit - galvanised
Height: 2.000 mm
Storage levels: 3

40374-00 Tyre rack


Standard unit - galvanised
Height: 2.500 mm
Storage levels: 4
Width: ca. 1 mtr.
Loading capacity (level): 150 kg
Depth: 42 cm

40375-00 Tyre rack


Extension unit - galvanised
Height: 2.500 mm
Storage levels: 4

40376-00 Tyre track


Standard unit - galvanised
Height: 3.000 mm
Storage levels: 5
Width: ca. 1 mtr.
Loading capacity (level): 150 kg
Depth: 42 cm

40377-00 Tyre rack


Extension unit - galvanised
Height: 3.000 mm
Storage levels: 5

Rack rail
for tyre rack Additional shelves can be
If additional rails must be added to the rack.
found in section 4.
40378-00 Length: 1.000 mm
Load per pair 150 kg

2/18
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
ECON TYRE SERVICE 2

Tyre inflator
TYRE INFLATOR

70168-00 Uncalibrated tyre inflator


Uncalibrated tyre inflator with 30-cm hose
Material: aluminium
Connection: standard SK nipple
30 cm rubber hose with car adapter
Pressure: max. 10 bar easy-to-read manometer,
with manometer protection, with overpressure
protection

70168-01 Calibrated tyre inflator


Calibrated tyre inflator with 30-cm hose
Material: aluminium
Connection: standard SK nipple
30 cm rubber hose with car adapter
Pressure: max. 12 bar
easy to read manometer, with manometer protection,
with overpressure protection
incl. 3 adapter set

ction
ne
rota g con

70172-00 Uncalibrated tyre inflator


tin

- Rotating connection head; the valve can be


filled in every position

- Impact-resistant, sturdy plastic housing 36


- Precision manometer up to 10 bar
- Readability of the manometer ensured Metal push button for
in each valve position air venting
Motorcycle, bicycle, quad and car
Lever pressed = filling
Rest position = check
Quick coupling

The classic manual tyre inflator with manometer


Ø 80 is the typical professional device for petrol
stations and workshops, hundred thousand times
proven.
The single lever operation for venting (halfway
pressed) and filling (fully pressed) is nearly suitable
for self-service. The connection is made via a
coupling plug DN 7.2. Rotating filling hose!

70170-00 Calibrated tyre inflator 2


with valve plug 1
70170-50 Calibrated tyre inflator 1

with instant plug 2


3
70169-00 Calibrated tyre inflator
with fuel station plug 3

2/19
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
2
wheel change TYRE SERVICE
ECON
TOOLS FOR
Tools/

TYRE CHANGE
Hexagon plug socket
These sockets are special productions
since there is only a 3/4" drive with
larger diameters.

80000-12 1/2” x 12 mm
80000-14 1/2” x 14 mm
80000-17 1/2” x 17 mm
80000-19 1/2” x 19 mm
80000-22 1/2” x 22 mm Suitable for impact screwdrivers

80000-24 1/2” x 24 mm Suitable for impact screwdrivers

80001-00 Special operation


• Suitable for quick-release axle
• 4 different hexagonal sizes:
17-19-22-24 mm
• suitable for Yamaha, Kawasaki, BMW,
Suzuki, Honda

80002-00 Special operation


•Three different interior hexagonal sizes:
19 mm: Yamaha
22 mm: Kawasaki, BMW
24 mm: Suzuki & Honda, BMW K1, K1000
• for mounting / disassembling the plug-in axle

80003-00 Hex socket set


• Is required when working on
motorcycle axles and forks
• 12.5 (½“) adapter
• Bit -sizes: 17, 19, 22 und 24 mm
• Chrom Vanadium

Socket wrench bit


holder - IMPACT
80561-3L Socket 22 mm x 1/2”
impact screwdrivers
Suitable for

80561-5L Socket 24 mm x 1/2”


80561-7L Socket 27 mm x 1/2”
80561-0L Socket 30 mm x 1/2”
80561-9L Socket 32 mm x 1/2”
80564-00 Socket 34 mm x 1/2”
80565-00 Socket 36 mm x 1/2”

2/20
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
ECON TYRE SERVICE 2

Werkzeuge/
Radwechsel
TOOLS FOR
TYRE CHANGE
80562-00 Wrench socket-multi-
point 55 mm, drive 3/4”
z. B. for MV AGUSTA wheel nut

80562-10 Wrench socket-hexagon


60 mm, drive 3/4”
z. B. for KTM wheel nut

80563-00 Impact adaptor


3/4” external x 1/2” internal

85071-00 Axle Nut Socket for


Ducati
• For loosening / tightening axle nuts
• Suitable for the following Ducati models:
1098, 1198 Streetfighter or Multistrada 1200,
748, 848, 916, 996, 998, Hypermotard,
Multistrada, Monster, Supersport, Sport Classic
• 55 mm 12-pt. for rear wheel axle
• 28 mm 6-pt. for front wheel axle
• material: aluminum alloy steel, anodized

85072-00 Axle Nut Socket Set


for Ducati
• for removal of the front and rear wheels
• includes the following sizes:
• 2-in-1 combined socket
• 55 mm, 12-pt for rear wheel nuts
• 28 mm, 6-pt for front wheel nuts
• 28 mm, 12-pt for front wheel nuts
• 30 mm, 6-pt for front wheel nuts
• 41 mm, 6-pt for for rear wheel nuts
• 46 mm, 12-pt for for rear wheel nuts
• material: aluminum alloy steel, anodized

85072-10 Ducati Front Axle


Alignment Tool, Ø 30 mm
• allows mounting and aligning of the front wheel axle
when tightening the axle nut
• suitable for Ducati 848, 1098, 1198 and other
models with 30 mm axle inner diameter
• material: aluminum alloy steel, anodized

85072-20 Ducati Front Axle


Alignment Tool, Ø 25 mm
• allows mounting and aligning of the front wheel
axle when tightening the axle nut
• suitable for Ducati 999, ST2, ST3, ST4, 620SS,
800SS, 1000SS and other models with 25 mm axle inner diameter
• material: aluminum alloy steel, anodized

2/21
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
2
Werkzeuge/
TYRE SERVICE
ECON
Radwechsel

TOOLS FOR TYRE


CHANGE

80393-10 Torque Wrench


• 1/2", 28 - 210 NM
• reversible ratchet with automatic release
with “click-signal“
• stop screw adjusts torque
• incl. adaptor to 3/8“ and extension bar
125 mm

80393-50 Torque Wrench


• 1/2", 42 - 210 NM
• reversible ratchet with automatic release
via “click signal“
• torque adjustable by stopping device
• high precision
• delivered with calibration certificate

80393-60 Torque Wrench


• 1/2", 70 - 350 NM
• reversible ratchet with automatic release
via “click signal“
• torque adjustable by stopping device
• high precision
• delivered with calibration certificate

GEDORE/CAROLUS
Mit Sichtfenster für den eingestellten Wert.
Sehr gut und einfach abzulesen. Präziser und
robuster Industrie-Drehmomentschlüssel

5900.100 Torque wrench 1/2" 20-100 Nm


• with mushroom head, fine-tuning 0,5 Nm

5900.200 Torque wrench 1/2" 40-200 Nm


• with mushroom head, fine-tuning 1,0 Nm

5900.300 Torque wrench 1/2" 60-300 Nm


• with mushroom head, fine-tuning1,0 Nm

2/22
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
ECON TYRE SERVICE 2

wheel change
TOOLS FOR

Tools/
TYRE CHANGE

90520-00 Impact screwdriver


TYPE WR 14DBDL • max. 235 Nm Scope of delivery:
HITACHI-,PSDFWVFUHZGULYHU ZLWK 14,4 • 1 battery charger UC 18YRS
• 2 batterys BSL 1450 14,4
V - 5,0 Ah Lithium-ion battery (5,0Ah) Li-Ion
• 1 transport case
Technical data (HIT-System Case)
• Bolts and nuts M10-M16
• High performance bolts M8-M14
• max. Fixed torque 235 Nm
• Fixed torque(Einzelschlag) 5/10/20/35 Nm
• Max. Fixed torque (Dauerschlag) 40/90/150/235 Nm
• Tool holding fixture 1/2"-male square

90525-00 Impact screwdriver Scope of delivery:


• 1 battery charger UC 18YRS
TYPE WR 18DBDL • max. 250 Nm • 2 batterys BSL 1850 18
(5,0Ah) Li-Ion
HITACHI-,PSDFWVFUHZGULYHU ZLWK • 1 transport case
18 V - 5,0 Ah Lithium-ion battery (HIT-System Case)

Technical data
• Bolts and nuts M10-M18
• High performance bolts M8-M16
• max. Fixed torque 235 Nm
• Fixed torque (Einzelschlag) 5/10/20/35 Nm
• Max. Fixed torque (Dauerschlag) 40/90/155/250 Nm
• Tool holding fixture 1/2"-male square

90508-00 Impact screwdriver


TYPE WR 18DSHL • 480 Nm 1/2” male
square
HITACHI impact screwdriver with
480 Nm, 18 V Lithium-ion battery

Slide battery
Technical data
· Bolts and nuts max. M22
· High performance bolts max. M16
· Idle speed 0-1,500/ min-1
· Save/Power full-load impact rate 0-2,000/ min-1 Scope of delivery:
· Tool holding fixture 1/2"-male square 1 charger UC 18YRSL,
480 Nm 2 batteries BSL 1830 18V (3,0Ah)
· Fixed torque
Lithium-ion
· Weight 3.4 Kg
1 carrying case,

90530-00 Impact screwdriver


TYPE WR 22SE • 610 Nm
• 610 Nm torque wrench / 800 Watt
• New triggerTumbler-type forward/reverse switch Scope of delivery:
• Maintenance Free • additional handle
• 1 carrying case
• Stable performance provided even at voltage drops
• Compatible with engine generators
• Aluminium Housing BodyDurability remarkably improved
• Bumper and Tail Bumper
• Soft grip Bolts and nuts Ø M14-M24
High performance bolts M16-M22
Fixed torque 610 Nm
Idle speed 1.400/min-1
Weight 4,6 Kg
2/18
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
2
compressors TYRE SERVICE ECON
Mobile

MOBILE COMPRESSORS

70162-00 Zenith 10
movable compressor
Pressure: 10 bar
Voltage: 230 Volt
Suction capacity: 200 l/min
Delivery quantity: 110 l/min
Performance: 1,1 KW
Boiler volume: 24 l
Weight: 14 kg

70163-00 Movable Power Pack


compressor

More compressors in section 7 - Compressed air supply


Slow running 2-cylinder, complete with filter,
pressure regulator, start unloader
with motor protection switch

Pressure: 10 bar
Voltage: 230 volts
Suction capacity: 340 l/min
Delivery quantity: 250 l/min
Performance: 2,2 KW
Boiler volume: 24 l
Weight: 40 kg

70163-10 Zenith Pro movable


compressor
oil-free version, maintenance-free
1-cylinder unit with induction motor and
Teflon piston, incl. 5-metre compressed air hose

Pressure: Voltage: 10 bar


Suction capacity: 230 volts
Delivery quantity: 240 l/min
Performance: 140 l/min
Boiler volume: 1,8 KW
Weight: 24 l
24 kg

70303-00 Compressor
Type Super Silent 90
• Movable reciprocating compressor in an oil-lubricate design
• -belt-driven, 2-cylinder,1-stage in-line unit
• TÜV certification not required due to 90-litre boile
• Start unloader via Condor pressure switch control
• With large, profiled, hard rubber wheel
• Condensate drainage occurs via a ball valv
• With sound insulation box for ultra silent operation

Boiler size L: 90
Boiler pressure bar: 10
Suction capacity L/min.: 460
Delivery quantity l/min.: 305
Rotational speed rev/min.: 1100
Sound pressure level LWA/dB: 82 /66
Engine KW/PS: 2,2/3
Volt/Hz: 230/50
Dimensions mm: 1200 x 450 x 960
Weight kg: 85
2/24
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
EXHAUST GAS SUCTION 3

Basics
REGULATION
Every workshop must be equipped with an
appropriate exhaust gas suction system!
offers ideal and affordable solutions.
Statutory regulations
I.) Accident prevention regulations VBG 1 V.) Extract from GUV 0.1 General
(version of July 1991) § 2:11§45 (2)
In compliance with the accident prevention regulation
VBG 1 (October 1991) § 45 section 2, gases, vapours, To prevent occupational accidents, the entrepreneur has
fog or dust dangerous to health must be suctioned away to set up facilities, make arrangements and take
at the point they are generated or at the point of measures which comply with the provisions of this
escape in a nondangerous manner. accident prevention regulation and the otherwise applicable
regulations, in addition to the generally recognised
III.) Extract from Workers' Safety Regulations for technical rules relating to safety and occupational medicine.
vehicle maintenance and repair:
As to § 2.1 - Entrepreneurs in this sense are also the
In compliance with ZH 1/98, release 12/93, federation, Länder, municipalities and municipal
the exhaust gases of combustion engines must associations, which are either members of an accident
be discharged safely. insurance carrier or are themselves carriers thereof.
This is especially true when running internal combustion
engines, for example during As to § 45 (2) - For work in which the development
– Maintenance work on the carburettor, ignition, of health-hazardous gases, vapours, fog or dust cannot
injection and compressed air systems be avoided in dangerous amounts, these must be
– Exhaust emission measurement suctioned away at the point of generation or escape
in a nondangerous manner.
IV.) Extract from ZH 1/454 Safety rules
for vehicle maintenance:

4.14.1 – Workplaces must be set up in such a way that


breathing air for the insured is kept free of flammable All suction systems offered
and health-hazardous gases, vapours,
dust and smoke through:
1. Suction in the area of generation
by
2. Technical ventilation
3. Natural ventilation or
meet the legal requirements.
4. A combination of the aforementioned Approved for AUK.
provisions Please refer to: Technical Rules
for Hazardous Substances TRGS 900 (emissions test on motorcycles)
"Limit values" (ZH 114 0 1).

Single-station suction Spring driven or electric reel Suction rail system for multiple Movable suction devices
workstations (platforms)

3/01
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
3
Suction
EXHAUST GAS SUCTION
systems

SUCTION SYSTEMS

Hose length freely selectable for an additional charge.


34300-40 Single-station suction
TYPE ECON I
Scope of delivery:
- Radial fan, 0.75 kW, 400 V
- 1,700 m³/h suction power, free-blowing
- 6-m special exhaust gas hose, 100-mm Ø, up to 200° C
- 6 hose clamps, 100-mm Ø
- 2 rubber exhaust gas funnels for dual exhaust
pipe 100 x 150 mm Ø without clamping pliers
- Y-piece, 100-mm Ø
- 150-mm escape pipe for connecting an exhaust air pipe

34300-50 Exhaust hose reel


with spring drive
TYPE ECON II
Multiple-station suction
The hose reel advantages are evident.
When it is not required, the hose is automatically
rolled up out of the way.
AUK-friendly!
No trip hazards and obstructions. (Air quantity)
The hose can be extended to 10-m length,
thereby allowing for a wider radius of action.
Scope of delivery:
- Hose reel with spring drive
- Radial fan, 0.75 kW, 400 V
- 1,700 m³/h suction power, free-blowing
- 6-m special exhaust gas hose, 100-mm Ø, up to 200° C
- 6 hose clamps, 100-mm Ø
- 2 rubber exhaust gas funnels for dual exhaust pipe
100 x 150 mm Ø without clamping pliers
- Y-piece, 100-mm Ø
- 150-mm escape pipe for connecting an exhaust air pipe

34300-55 Exhaust hose reel Hose length freely selectable for an additional charge.
with electric drive
TYPE ECON II-E
Multi-station suction
The reel with electric drive is the comfort solution.
The delivered button moves the hose up or down.
Special feature: When the hose moves down,
the fan switches automatically on.
The exhaust gas hose is mounted and
the reel is actually ready for installation
on the ceiling or wall.
Hose up to 16 m possible (DN 100).
Scope of delivery:
- Electric reel
- Up/down button (fan on/off)
- Radial fan, 0.75 kW, 400 V
- 1,700 m³/h suction power, free-blowing
- 6-m special exhaust gas hose, 100-mm Ø, up to 200° C
- 6 hose clamps, 100-mm Ø
- 2 rubber exhaust gas funnels for dual exhaust pipe
100 x 150 mm Ø without clamping pliers
- Y-piece, 100-mm Ø
AUK-friendly!
- 150-mm escape pipe for connecting an exhaust air pipe (Air quantity)

3/02
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
EXHAUST GAS SUCTION 3

systems
Suction
SUCTION SYSTEMS

34300-60 Suction rail system


type ECON III
Compact system for up to 4 workstations.
Scope of delivery:
- 6-m aluminium duct with sealing lip
- One carriage for displacing 100 mm
- 6-m high-temperature exhaust gas hose
100 mm - 200° C.
- 2 150/100 rubber funnels, heat-resistant,
malleable, soft rubber
- 0.75 KW / 400 volt fan for the suction-side
connection to the suction rail system
- 100-mm y-distributor for dual exhaust pipe
- 6 special hose clamps for exhaust gas hose
Please order ceiling or wall
fixtures separately!

31300-03 Suction rail system


3-m extension without carriage

37100-25 Wall exhaust air set


This exhaust air set is intended for the exhaust
air ducting through a wall not too far away
(up to 4 m) from the exhaust gas fan.
You can easily install it yourself.
Scope of delivery:
- flexible aluminium pipe, 1.25-m long, DN 150
- extensible up to max. 5 m
- discharge duct with bird protection grid
- connecting and supporting material, DN 150
- 2 hose and 2 pipe clamps DN 150

37100-27 Roof exhaust air set


This exhaust air set is intended for the exhaust air
ducting through a flat roof (up to 3% slope) Exhaust spout

You can easily install it yourself.


Gluing
Scope of delivery:
provided onsite
- flexible aluminium pipe, 1.25-m long, DN 150
- extensible up to max. 5 m
- Roof duct without insulation Roof duct
- 90° exhaust spout
- 2 pipe clamps DN 150
- 2 hose clamps for the aluminium pipe

34100-25 Exhaust gas suction


Height adjustment

movable motorcycle
· 6-m exhaust air pipe 120 mm
· Base plate with 4 castors (2 lockable)
suction, movable,

· Height adjustment to approx. 100 cm


CAR on request

· 2 horizontally adjustable, moving funnels,


Exhaust gas

e.g. dual exhaust pipe on motorbike or car.


· 0.55 KW – 220-volt fan

34100-21 Extension for


exhaust air hose
length 6 m, with 1 connector
and 2 hose clamps, DN 120 mm

3/03
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
3 Spare parts
EXHAUST GAS SUCTION

SPARE PARTS

36100-160 Exhaust gas funnel


Rubber funnel without clamping pliers
100 x 150 mm incl. metal connection
100 mm to connect hose
36100-162 Exhaust gas funnel
Rubber funnel without clamping pliers
150 x 190 mm incl. metal connection
150 mm to connect hose

33300-22 Metal funnel exhaust


gas stand
for AUK or test stand, consisting of:
- Base plate
- Stand for the height and tilt adjustment
of the exhaust gas funnel
- 200-mm hose connection
- 300-mm suction
- Height approx. 1200 mm

33300-23 Single converter


with extended intake manifold
• for AUK-exhaust gas funnel 100 x 150
• with spline end

33300-24 Gassing funnel metal


for test bench, consists of:
• base plate
• Tripod for adjusting the height and tilt of
the exhaust straightener
• Funnel with hose connection 200 mm
• suction 300 mm
• Height ca. 1200 mm

3 EXHAUST GAS SUCTION


solutions
Special

SPECIAL SOLUTIONS
Sound insulation cabin
Sound insulation cabin for test stand
with standard elements, entrance door,
window and ceiling structure for
easy self-assembly.

Please require your desired


size and design.

3/04
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
EXHAUST GAS SUCTION 3

solutions
Special
SPECIAL SOLUTIONS

Ideal for performance test stands, suction on motorcycles


or quads, special vehicles, mowers, etc.
WE HAVE THE RIGHT SOLUTION!

Flexible suction arm


consisting of wall bracket,
inner parallelogram supporting elements
with spring assistance.
The suction arms can hold any cantilevered position.
The 360° rotating suction hood can
swivel in any direction.
The suction arms are suitable
for connection to central systems or for
equipment with individual fans.

30110-00 Standard suction arm


length 2 m Dimensions
Ø 150 mm, hose design with PVC hood,
wall bracket with 0.75-kW fan,
400 volts, arm with inner
supporting element Ø 150 mm

30111-00 Standard suction arm


length 3 m 2,30 m
otherwise same design as Art. 30110-00

30112-00 Standard suction arm


length 4 m 2,0 m 3,0 m 4,0 m
otherwise same design as Art. 30110-00

30110-01 Standard suction arm


length 5 m Dimensions
other design as Art. 30110-00
with 3-m swivel arm extension

30111-01 Standard suction arm


length 6 m
other design as Art. 30111-00
with 3-m swivel arm extension

30112-01 Standard suction arm


length 7 m
other design as Art. 30112-00
with 3-m swivel arm extension

3/05
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
3
Fans
EXHAUST GAS SUCTION

FANS

35100-03 High performance radial fan


for exhaust gases or other harmful
substances; it can be used as a cooling fan.
Power: 0,75 kW, 400 Volt, 3 Phases
• Casing made of cast aluminium
• High levels of smoke and dust
• Non-stop operation
Air capacity ca. 2.000 m³

35100-04 High performance


radial fan
same details as the product before
but other power consumption:
1,1 kW
Air capacity ca. 2.200 m³

30480-00 Wall bracket for fans


0.75 and 1.1 kW

35101-05 High performance radial fan


for exhaust gases or other harmful
substances; it can be used as a cooling fan.
Power: 1.5 kW, 400 volts, 3 phases
Fan made of sheet steel, flanged
to the engine, including pedestal.
Suction and pressure nozzles
200 mm for pipe or hose connection
Air capacity ca. 2,400 m³

35101-10 High performance


radial fan
Same design as before but
power: 2.2 kW, 400 volts, 3 phases,
air capacity approx. 2,500 m³

35101-15 High performance


radial fan
Same design as before but
power: 3.0 kW, 400 volts, 3 phases,
air capacity approx. 3,200 m³

35101-20 High performance


radial fan
Same design as before but
power: 4.0 kW, 400 volts, 3 phases,
air capacity approx. 4,000 m³,
suction and pressure nozzles 250 mm
3/06
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
EXHAUST GAS SUCTION 3

exhaust gas blower


MOVABLE

Movable
EXHAUST GAS BLOWER
The 2,000 m³/h suction blower is universally applicable.
No matter whether you want to suction welding fumes, dust or motor vehicle exhaust gases: the suction
blower is a universal solution for a variety of applications. It can also be excellently used for ventilation.
So you can use it to convey fresh air into containers, pipes or other containers. The suction blower
can be used in a very flexible manner and carried or wheeled for transport. Both housing and
impeller are made of spark-proof silumin cast material. The surfaces of the fan and
supporting element/chassis are powder-coated. It is delivered as a
portable/movable version, including 5.0 m connection cable and motor
circuit-breaker, without accessories. Hoses with 100-mm, 150-mm and
160-mm Ø can be fitted on the suction and pressure sides
with the supplied sealing locks.

3091623- Exhaust gas blower


100 movable/portable,
fan power: 2,000 m³/h,
engine: 0.75 kW, 1 x 230 V / 50 Hz

3093084 PVC exhaust air hose


Ø 150 mm, length 6 m

EXHAUST GAS SUCTION 3

exhaust gas suction


Accessories for the
ACCESSORIES FOR THE
Bayonet lock
To rapidly detach or connect the
EXHAUST GAS SUCTION
exhaust air hose of a tripod funnel
or to connect two hoses.

36100-173 Ø 100 mm
36100-176 Ø 125 mm
36100-177 Ø 150 mm

36100-186 Wall mounted hose holder


for exhaust gas hoses up to 100 mm,
aluminium or steel galvanised

36100-188 Wall mounted hose holder


for exhaust gas hoses up to 150 mm,
aluminium or steel galvanised

Motor circuit-breaker
400 volts, 3 phases, for securing and
On/Off switch for exhaust gas fans.

35102-10 1.6 - 2.5 amps


for 0.75 und 0-85 Kw fans

35102-20 2.5 - 4.0 amps


for 1.1 Kw fans

35102-30 4.0 - 6.3 amps


for 1.5 and 2.2 Kw fans

3/07
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
3 EXHAUST GAS SUCTION
gas hose
Exhaust

ACCESSORIES FOR THE


EXHAUST GAS SUCTION
Exhaust gas hoses are made
of highly flexible material. They are
resistant to petrol, diesel, oils, grease,
solvents, as well as, on the short term,
to temperatures up to 200° C.

Exhaust gas hoses are


specifically suitable for motor and
spring driven reels, suction rail systems
as well as wall mounted units.

Standard 200° C
exhaust gas hose
36100-100 Æ
100 mm 1 m
125 mm 1 m (at least 2.5 m)*
36100-102 Æ
150 mm 1 m (at least 2.5 m)*
36100-104 Æ
*Available lengths: 2.5 - 5.0 - 7.5 - 10.0 m.
High-temperature exhaust gas
hoses are made of specially coated high
temperature fabric with external spiral wrap
providing abrasion protection, made of rust-free,
stainless, hot-dipped galvanised steel. To
protect against paint damage on vehicles, this
is covered with a plastic coating. They are
temperature resistant up to +300°C (short term
up to 350°C) and are particularly suitable for
petrol and diesel engine exhaust gases and
other higher-temperature exhaust gases.

Exhaust gas hose


high temperature
up to 300°C
36100-200 Æ
100 mm, at least 2.5 m
125 mm, at least 2.5 m
36100-202 Æ
150 mm, at least 2.5 m
36100-204 Æ
Available lengths: 2.5 - 5.0 - 7.5 - 10.0 m

EXHAUST GAS HOSE High temperature up to 600 °C on request.


Bail
Galvanised special steel
hose clamps, with bail for
ECON standard
exhaust gas hoses
36100-112 Æ 100 mm

36100-114 Æ
125 mm

36100-116 Æ
150 mm
3/08
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
EXHAUST GAS SUCTION 3

Accessories
Piping /
ACCESSORIES FOR THE
EXHAUST GAS SUCTION
Spiral pipe
37100-100 Ø 150 mm
37100-102 Ø 200 mm
37100-104 Ø 250 mm
Delivered lengths: 3 m

90° bend
37100-106 Ø 150 mm
37100-108 Ø 200 mm
37100-110 Ø 250 mm

90° hose branch piece


37100-112 Ø 150 mm
37100-114 Ø 200 mm
37100-116 Ø 250 mm

Reducer
37100-118 Ø 150 mm
37100-120 Ø 200 mm
37100-122 Ø 250 mm

45° Y-piece
37100-124 Ø 100 mm
37100-126 Ø 150 mm

Deflector hood
37100-128 Ø 150 mm
37100-130 Ø 200 mm
37100-132 Ø 250 mm

Wall rose and rain collar


37100-134 Ø 150 mm
37100-136 Ø 200 mm
37100-138 Ø 250 mm

45° discharge duct


with grid
37100-140 Ø 150 mm
37100-142 Ø 200 mm Bird
protection grid
37100-144 Ø 250 mm

Shut-off flap
37100-146 Ø 150 mm
37100-148 Ø 200 mm
37100-149 Ø 250 mm
3/09
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
3 EXHAUST GAS SUCTION
Accessories
Piping /

ACCESSORIES FOR THE


EXHAUST GAS SUCTION
Roof duct Flat roof
37100-154 Ø 150 mm Adhering flange
37100-156 Ø 200 mm
37100-158 Ø 250 mm

Aluminium flex pipe


extensible and flexible,
2-ply aluminium
37100-166 Ø 150 mm
37100-168 Ø 200 mm
Available lengths: 1.25 m - extended up to 5 m
37100-169 Ø 250 mm

Hose clamp
36100-124 Ø 150 mm
36100-126 Ø 200 mm

Pipe Connector,
pipe electrical connector
37100-173 Ø 150 mm
37100-174 Ø 200 mm
37100-176 Ø 250 mm

Form connector,
preform plug connector
37100-178 Ø 150 mm
37100-180 Ø 200 mm
37100-182 Ø 250 mm

Spigot
37100-184 Ø 150 mm
37100-186 Ø 200 mm
37100-188 Ø 250 mm

Galvanised pipe clamp


37100-190 Ø 150 mm
37100-191 Ø 200 mm
37100-192 Ø 250 mm

Quick connector
zinc-plated, 2-piece
with tensioning lever
37100-194 Ø 150 mm
37100-196 Ø 200 mm

Sound damper
37100-198 Ø 150 mm
37100-200 Ø 200 mm
37100-202 Ø 250 mm
3/10
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
EXHAUST GAS SUCTION 3

Welding fume
WELDING FUME

suction
SUCTION
SmartMaster Extraction Filter
Unit
The basic mobile welding smoke extraction unit is designed
for occasional use with low amounts of dust. The rotating
and swiveling exhaust hood enables use in a 360-degree
radius and ensures only few adjustments during welding.
The basic device is suitable for welding high alloy steel due to
its W3 approval.

welding smoke filter


Engine 1,1 kW, 1 x 230 V / 50 Hz
• W3/IFA certified
• Handle with cable holder
• Rotating exhaust hood

64 300 Filter with 1 sunction arm 2 m.


64 330 Filter with 1 sunction arm 3 m.

Suction
950 --- --- Welding tables
sturdy welded steel structure
with multi-layer coating,
drain grate and suction manifold

490 047 Table size: 1,000 x 800 x 850 mm


(WxDxH), suction manifold Ø 160 mm

490 048 Table size: 1,500 x 800 x 850 mm


(WxDxH), suction manifold Ø 250 mm

490 049 Table size: 2,000 x 800 x 850 mm


(WxDxH), suction manifold Ø 250 mm
Removal by suction

99 820 ---- Grinding and welding table


sturdy welded steel structure, drain grate, Cinder drawer,
undertable and rear wall capturing as well as
two foldable side walls

0004 Table size: 1,010 x 1,000 x 1,700 mm


(WxDxH), working depth 800 mm,
working height 800 mm
0023 Table size: 1,360 x 1,000 x 1,700 mm
(WxDxH), working depth 800 mm,
working height 800 mm
0029 Table size: 1,510 x 1,000 x 1,700 mm
(WxDxH), working depth 800 mm,
working height 800 mm
0016 Table size: 2,000 x 1,000 x 1,700 mm
(WxDxH), working depth 800 mm,
working height 800 mm
More filters and suction systems on request!
3/11
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
3 ABGASABSAUGUNG
Ventilatoren
Mobile

MOBILE VENTILATOREN

Mobile Ventilatoren für den vielseitigen Einsatz


• Mobile fan with carrying handle and four rubber feet for low-vibration operation
• Suitable for extracting hot air, welding fumes, saw dust, smoke, gases, smells, dust or
other contaminated exhaust air
• Useful for supplying fresh air to poorly ventilated places
• Useful for cooling, aerating, drying and ventilating large rooms such as factories,
workshops, shop floors, building sites, etc.
• Facilitates the supply or extraction of air volumes over longer distances in combination
with an optional 10 m hose

35103-00 Mobile Fan EMV30


Technical Data
Basket Ø 380 mm
Paddle wheel Ø 300 mm
Air capacity max. 3900 m³/h
Engine Speed 2800 min-¹
Performance 500 W
Voltage 230 V / 50 Hz
Weight 15 kg
Measurement (L x B x H) 420 x 380 x 380 mm

35103-10 Mobile Fan EMV50


Technical Data Technische Daten
Basket Ø 580 mm
Paddle wheel Ø 500 mm
Air capacity max. 9000 m³/h
Engine Speed 1400 min-¹
Performance 1100 W
Voltage 230 V / 50 Hz
Weight 39 kg
Measurement (L x B x H) 670 x 670 x 485 mm

35103-20 Mobile Fan EMV60


Technical Data Technische Daten
Basket Ø 685 mm
Paddle wheel Ø 600 mm
Air capacity max. 14400 m³/h
Engine Speed 1400 min-¹
Performance 2000 W
Voltage 230 V / 50 Hz
Weight 64 kg
Measurement (L x B x H) 770 x 770 x 575 mm

Accessories
35103-05 Tube Ø 300 mm / 10 m
35103-15 Tube Ø 500 mm / 10 m
35103-25 Tube Ø 600 mm / 10 m

3/12
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STORAGE AND WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT 4

ECON workshop equipment

4/01
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
4
Workbench
STORAGE AND WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT

CABINET AND
systems

WORKBENCH SYSTEMS
stands for Econ Arbeitsplatz-Ordnungs-System
A subject such as workplace has been developed
in its entirety by ECON for many years.
A system like that has been finely tailored to the
needs resulting from workshop procedures, where by workplace
we also mean parts storage with shelves and boxes.
Along these lines, especially open spaces are left
to your personal design. Only a carefully planned and equipped
workshop can be profitable and produce sustained earnings.
ECON puts forward possible solutions: enquire about them!
9000
425 542 Work bench
B 1500 x T 700 x H 40 mm
• High-quality, solid beech plate
• With two cross-glued cover veneers on both sides
• Surface treated and ground
9000
425 544 Work bench
B 2000 x T 700 x H 40 mm
• High-quality, solid beech plate
• With two cross-glued cover veneers on both sides
• Surface treated and ground

40420-00 ECON Workbench base I


• T 500 x H 800 - 1100 mm, height-adjustable
• RAL 9006
• Special colors on request

40420-10 ECON Workbench base II


• T 500 x H 800 - 1100 mm, height-adjustable
• RAL 9006 - Special colors on request
• Socket 230V incl. Rear cover with
PG16 (without connection cable)
• Compressed air connection (without connecting cable)

Cable and compressed air guide under the bench.

4/02
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STORAGE AND WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT 4
CABINET AND
WORKBENCH SYSTEMS
9000- Workbench system
425 528 Promat
B 1.500 x T 700 x H 840 mm
Light gray / enzian blue, 40 mm beech plate
with deck veneer
Drawer cabinet: 2 x 90 mm, 3 x 180 mm

9000- Workbench system


425 530 Promat
B 2.000 x T 700 x H 840 mm
Light gray / enzian blue, 40 mm beech plate
with deck veneer
Drawer cabinet: 2 x 90 mm, 3 x 180 mm

9000- Workbench system


425 311 Promat
B 1.500 x T 700 x H 840 mm
Gray / brilliant blue, 40 mm beech
With deck veneer
Drawer cabinet: 1 x 120 mm, 2 x 180 mm, 1 x
240 mm
9000- Workbench system
425 312 Promat
B 1.500 x T 700 x H 840 mm
Gray / brilliant blue, 40 mm beech
With deck veneer
Drawer cabinet: 1 x 120 mm, 2 x 180 mm, 1 x
240 mm

9000- Workbench system


425 315 Promat
B 2.000 x T 700 x H 840 mm
Gray / brilliant blue, 40 mm beech
With deck veneer
Drawer cabinet: 1 x 120 mm, 2 x 180 mm, 1 x
240 mm
9000- Workbench system
425 316 Promat
B 2.000 x T 700 x H 840 mm
Gray / anthracite, 40 mm beech plate
With deck veneer
Drawer cabinet: 1 x 120 mm, 2 x 180 mm, 1 x
240 mm

Assembly bench
Subframe made from solid tubular steel ·
folding · beech multiplex board with edge
protection · extremely robust
4000-
870 126 B 800 x T 500 x H 840 mm
4000-
870 127 B 1.000 x T 700 x H 840 mm
4000-
870 128 B 1.200 x T 700 x H 840 mm
4/03
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
4
Werkbank-
STORAGE AND WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT

CABINET AND
systeme

WORKBENCH SYSTEMS
9000 Cabinet
425 560 820 x 580 x 650 (HxBxT)
• light grey/gentian blue
• Robust steel plate construction powder coated
• Drawers with roller-bearing
single pull-outs 90% pull-out, load
capacity 75 kg
• Number of drawers x height: 4 x 180 mm
• internal dimensions W 490 x D 560 mm
• Integrated grips with colour screen
• Central locking with cylinder lock
• Cabinet top with melamine resin coated,
black worktop, thickness 20 mm
• Worktop can be dismantled to use the cabinet
as an under-cabinet

9000 Cabinet
425 562 820 x 580 x 650 (HxBxT)
• Design as Art. 9000 425 560
• But number of drawers x height: 2 x 90 mm and 3 x 180 mm

47280-00 Cabinet
962 x 674 x 500 (HxBxT)
• Without worktable
• 9 Heavy duty ball bearing slide drawers
• 100% retractable drawers
• Front centralized lock
• Compatible for SFS (Sonic Foam system)
• Max. drawer capacity: 40 kg
• RAL grey: 9006/RAL black: 9004

47296-00 Cabinet
962 x 845 x 500 (HxBxT)
Optional also with
• Without worktable Wooden or stainless steel
• Other execution as Art. 47280-00 worktable available

47308-00 Cabinet with door


962 x 674 x 500 (HxBxT)
• Without worktable
• 4 Heavy duty ball bearing slide drawers
• 100% retractable drawers
• Front centralized lock
• Compatible for SFS (Sonic Foam system)
• Max. drawer capacity: 40 kg
• RAL grey: 9006/RAL black: 9004

47379-00 Cabinet with door


962 x 845 x 500 (HxBxT)
• Without worktable
Optional also with
• Other execution as Art. 47308-00 Wooden or stainless steel
worktable available

Further versions of drawers on request!


4/04
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STORAGE AND WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT 4

Workbench
CABINET AND

systems
WORKBENCH SYSTEMS

47288-00 Closet
962 x 674 x 500 (HxBxT)
• Without worktable
• 2 adjustable shelves
• Front centralized lock
• RAL grey: 9006/RAL black: 9004

47302-00 Closet
962 x 845 x 500 (HxBxT)
• Without worktable
• Other execution as Art. 47288-00 Optional also with
Wooden or stainless steel
worktable available

9000 Tool cabinet


425 943 1000 x 500 x 500 (HxBxT)
• steel plate
• shelf base with circumferential 20 mm rim
• hinged doors can be locked with cylinder lock
• drawers and shelf base pull-out depth 80%,
prevented from pulling out completely
• carrying capacity each shelf 50 kg
• carrying capacity each drawer 35 kg
• height-adjustable drawer and shelf, 25 mm intervals
• top shelf has raised lip and can be fitted with
rubber trim

9000 Tool cabinet


425 944 1000 x 500 x 500 (HxBxT)
• same as Art. 9000 425 94
• but with 2 drawes and
1 extractable floor

9000 Tool cabinet


452 356 1350 x 500 x 500 (HxBxT)
• Light gray/blue
• moveable
• With 1 drawer H 100 mm and 2 shelves,
height 30 mm
• Desk top attachment
• Robust castors with 4 castors Ø 75
mm, load capacity 75 kg per roll

9000 Tool cabinet


425 942 1350 x 500 x 500 (HxBxT)
• lihgtgrey/anthracite grey
• moveable
• 1 tool cabinet H 1000 x W 500 x D 500 mm
with 1 drawer H 90 mm and 2 shelves, height 20 mm
• desk top
• robust frame with 4 castors dia. 75 mm,
safe working load 75 kg per castor

4/05
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
4
Werkzeug-
STORAGE AND WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT
wagen

TOOL TROLLEY

42046-10 Workshop wagon


• In strong, sheet steel construction, torsionally rigid,
to take high loadings
• Working platform with ABS top
• Side frame with square perforation for accessories
• 6 drawers with telescopic full extension and individual
locking device (single-hand operation)
• Individual locking device on every drawer prevents
them from opening when the trolley is in motion
• Load capacity 25 kg per drawer, variable partitionable
• variabel einteilbar
• Drawer size inside: W 482 x D 345 mm,
front height 4x 69 mm, 1x 144 mm, 1x 218 mm
• Central locking with cylinder lock, supplied with two keys
• Two swivel castors Ø 100 mm, one with double wheel locking,
two fixed castors Ø 140 mm, laterally protruding, therefore
high stability
• Load capacity 210 kg
• Dimensions: H 910 x W 628 x D 418 mm (without handle)

42046-20 Workshop wagon


• same design as Art. 42046-10

4000-
871 119 Workshop wagon Promat
755 x 470 x 910 mm cable box
• With additional cable box and document storage
• Stable powder coated steel sheet construction
• Body blue RAL 5022 Drawers black
• With large, load-bearing worktop with
PVC ripple rubber pad
• 6 on ball-bearing telescopic rails (100% extension) pull-
out drawers
• Individually divisible, of which 4 approx. 60 mm high,
2 approx. 125 mm high (12 subdivisions are
included)
• Lockable by means of built-in cylinder lock with 2
keys
• Steering wheel steerable thereof 1 wheel lockable
• Cable length of the cable box = 10 m
• Drawer usable area 600 x 380 mm
• Load capacity per drawer approx. 25 kg
• Suitable inserts with tools see Art.-Nr.
4000871100, 4000871101 und
4000871102

4/06
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STORAGE AND WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT 4

Werkzeug-
wagen
TOOL TROLLEY

Workshop wagon
• Solid steel sheet construction, torsionally rigid
• Wheel set 63801, 4 large wheels, 2 swivel castors Ø 100 mm, including 1
wheel with anchor, 2 wheels Ø 140 mm, high side safety, load capacity
per wheel set 210 kg
• Drawers with telescopic pull-out drawer, load capacity 25 kg per
drawer, variably divisible, central locking with 2 keys
• Drawers with single locking via a practical one-hand operating system,
prevents the drawers from opening during driving
• Working surface made of ABS with deep-drawn work surfaces and small parts
troughs, favorable storage possibilities, prevents the rolling down of work material
• Side walls with holes for attaching our various accessories
• Measurements: H 930 x W 720 x D 410 mm (including handle)
• Inside drawer size: 482 x 345 mm
• Standard color RAL 3003/7016

40600-50
40600-50 5 2 x 75, 2 x 150, 1 x 225
40600-60 6 3 x 75, 3 x 150
40600-70 7 5 x 75, 2 x 150

40600-44 Tool chest


• Drawers with telescopic pull-out drawer, single locking of
each drawer via a practical one-hand operating system,
load capacity of the drawer 25 kg
• Working surface made of ABS with small parts
• Central locking with cylinder lock
• Practical carrying handles on the side
40600-60
• Side walls with perforation
• Measurement: H 403 x B x 630 x T 410 mm
• Standard color RAL 3003/7016

4 75

40600-70

4/07
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
4
Werkzeug-
STORAGE AND WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT

TOOL TROLLEY
module

MODULE

4000- Promat System


871 100 tool module 1
73-piece, width 595 x length 377 mm
1/4" square drive, lever flex handle ratchet, hexagon
socket wrench bits, inner TORX, outer TORX, bits for
hex keys, bits for slotted-head screws, bits for cross
recess screws, extensions, cardan joint,
hanedl with square box wrench

1/2" square drive, lever flex handle ratchet, hexagon


socket wrench bits, bits for spark plugs, outer TORX,
inner TORX, extensions, cardan joint

4000- Tool module 2


871 101 Promat System
43-piece, width 595 x length 377 mm
Combination wrench set, water pump pliers,
combination pliers, side cutter, cross pein hammer,
cutter knife, pocket spring-tape measure, telescopic
magnetic lifter with nozzle adjusting pin, beams,
LED inspection lamp, TORX angle screwdriver set,
hexagon screwdriver set, slotted-head screwdriver,
cross recess screwdriver

4000- Promat System


871 102 tool module 3
Width 595 x Length 377 mm
PZD screwdriver, TORX screwdriver, slotted-head
screwdriver, PH screwdriver, bit/socket wrench set,
hexagon screwdriver, bit holder with handle 1/4 inch

46194-27 Double open-end wrench set


964/1 AOS
12-piece 6-32 mm
Width 188 x Length 364 mm

WP1 / WP2

46194-30 Open-end wrench set


964/2 AOS
12-piece 8-24 mm
Width 188 x Length 364 mm

WP1 / WP2

4/08
Die Abbildungen können Sonderausstattungen zeigen die nicht zum Lieferumfang gehören.
Abbildungen, Beschreibungen, Farben und Maße sind unverbindlich und dienen nur der Veranschaulichung. Änderungen behalten wir uns vor.
STORAGE AND WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT 4

Tool trolley
TOOL TROLLEY

module
MODULE
- Tool modules are suitable for the neatly arranged and
organised storage of tools on workbenches and tool trolleys.
The modules can be used also at high temperatures,
absorb no moisture and, with a normal use, have a long service life.
46194-32 Double open-end wrench
964/3 AOS
8-piece 6-22 mm
Width 188 x Length 364 mm
WP1 / WP2

46194-34 1/4" ratchet set


964/5 AOS
45-piece
Width 188 x Length 364 mm

Tool inserts suitable for Unior system


WP1 / WP2

46194-35 Pliers set


964/6 AOS
3-piece
Width 188 x Length 364 mm
WP1 / WP2

46194-36 Wapu gripping pliers set


964/7 AOS
2-piece
Width 188 x Length 364 mm
WP1 / WP2

46194-38 Screwdriver set


964/9 AOS
8-piece recess and cross
Width 188 x Length 364 mm
WP1 / WP2

46194-51 1/2" ratchet set


964/22 AOS
60-piece
Width 564 x Length 364 mm
WP2

46194-43 3/8" ratchet set


964/25 AOS
23-piece
Width 188 x Length 364 mm
WP2
4/09
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
4
Werkzeug-
STORAGE AND WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT
wagen

TOOL TROLLEY

714040 Tool trolley


with 140 professional tools
• 6 drawers; 4 shallow drawers, 2 deep drawers 4
4 shallow drawers (dim. 575 x 370 x 60mm)
2 deep drawers (dim. 575 x 370 x 137mm)
• No drawer release system intgegrated
• Powder coating exterior
• front centralized safety lock
• folding keys
• ABS top blade
• can holder
• 4 casters Ø 100mm, whereof 2 swivel casters with rolling and turning brake
• Drawer capacity: 40KG
• Static load capacity: 400KG
• RAL BLACK: 9004

720606 Challenge 2
tool trolley
with 206 professional tools
• 7 ball bearing mounted drawers
• Foam pad
• Can holder
• Central locking system
• Central locking
• Drawers 100% extensible
• Powder coating
• 4 solid rubber wheels

Single tool modules on request!


4/10 The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STORAGE AND WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT 4

Werkzeug-
WERKZEUGWAGEN

Module
MODULE

724006 Tool trolley


with 241 professional tools
• In total 7 drawers, thereof 5 shallow, - 2 deep
5 shallow drawers (dim. 575 x 370 x 65mm)
2 deep drawers (dim. 575 x 370 x 145mm)
• Side handle
• 100% extractable drawers
• Anti-slip foam mat
• Front centralized safety-lock
• Can holder
• Rubber casters (Ø 125mm-50mm) 2x swivel casters
with brake and 2x fixed
• Drawers loadable up to 40kg
• Dimensions in mm: W 690 x D 460 x H 1020
• Available in black RAL: 9004

728406 Challenge 1
tool trolley
285 professional tools
• 7 ball bearing mounted drawers
• Foam pad
• Can holder
• Central locking system
• Central locking
• Drawers 100% extensible
• Powder coating
• 4 solid rubber wheels

Single tool modules on request!


4/11
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
4
Werkzeug-
STORAGE AND WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT
wagen

TOOL TROLLEY

723931 Tool trolley


with 239 professional tools
• 8 drawers - 7 shallow drawers, 1 deep drawers
• Drawer blocking system, as protection against tipping over
• Fully 100% retractable drawers
• Stainless Steel topblade
• Front centralized safety lock
• 4x extra large wheels ø 125mm, where
of 2x casters with rolling and turning brake
• Drawer capacity: 40 kg
• Measurements: L859 x W532 x H1035mm
• RAL grey: 7011

Combination wrench with ratchet

726131 Tool trolley


with 261 professional tools
• 8 drawers - 7 shallow drawers, 1 deep drawers
• Drawer blocking system, as protection against tipping over
• Fully 100% retractable drawers
• Stainless Steel topblade
• Front centralized safety lock
• 4x extra large wheels ø 125mm, where
of 2x casters with rolling and turning brake
• Drawer capacity: 40 kg
• Abmessungen: L 859 x B 532 x H 1035 mm
• RAL grey: 7011

Ringgabel
key with
ratchet

4/12
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STORAGE AND WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT 4

Tool trolley
TOOL TROLLEY

729516 Tool trolley S10


with 295 professional tools
• 8 ball bearing mounted drawers,
(7 small drawers and 1 large one)
• Drawers 100% extensible, 40-kg load capacity
• Powder coating
• Central locking system
• ABS plastic worktop
• 2 integrated can holders
• 1 integrated paper roll holder
• 1 integrated waste container
• 4 solid rubber wheels
• Net weight 91 kg
• Maximum load capacity 400 kg
• L 830 x H 1,050 x W 525 mm

Available in:
Blue / Red / Black / Gray

4/13
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
4
Werkzeug-
STORAGE AND WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT
wagen

TOOL TROLLEY

734529 Tool trolley S12


with 345 professional tools
• In total 8 drawers, thereof 7 shallow, -
1 deep
• Stainless steel worktop
• Plastic edge protection
• Front centralized safety-lock
• 100% extractable drawers
• Ball-bearing drawers
• 4 rubber casters (Ø 125mm-50mm)
2x swivel casters with brake and 2x fixed
• Can holder
• Paper roll holder
• Perforated panels to hang up various accessories
• Available in grey RAL: 7011
• Net weight: 97kg
• Maximum load: 400kg
• Drawers loadable up to 40kg
• Dimensions in mm: W 1030 x D 532 x H 1035
combination wrench with Ratchet

Other workshop wagon with or without tools on request!


4/14
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STORAGE AND WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT 4

Werkzeug-
koffer
Toolbox

709601 Tool case


96-piece
• 3 Drawers
• Central locking
• Powder coating

712521 Toolbox
125-piece
• 3 drawers with ball bearing slides
• Front centralized safety lock
• Powder coating

Individual tool modules on request!


Individual tools such as screwdrivers, wrenches,
pliers, hammers etc. can be found in heading 8.

Tools in inch sizes on request.


4/15
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
4 STORAGE AND WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT
systems
Interior

INTERIOR SYSTEMS

ECON - PLANNING PROPOSAL


2,100 mm

6,536 mm

Every single element can be provided individually.


Further planning proposals:
4730230 230 modular workstation
system
• 1 locker - 610 x 530 x 2,000 mm
2,000 mm

• 1 drawer cabinet - 845 x 500 x 1,002 mm


9 drawers (8 x H 60, 1 x H 137 mm)
• Cabinet with 2 doors and insert shelf
845 x 500 x 1,002 mm
• Wood worktop 40 mm
• 2 wall cabinets - 845 x 300 x 400 mm
• 2 perforated walls
Self-supporting structure

Also available with stainless steel worktop.


2,300 mm
4730281 280 modular workstation
system
• 1 locker - 610 x 530 x 2,000 mm
• 1 drawer cabinet - 845 x 500 x 1,002 mm
9 drawers (8 x H 60, 1 x H 137 mm)
2,000 mm

• 1 drawer cabinet - 674 x 500 x 1,002 mm


4 drawers (H 60 mm)
• Cabinet with 2 doors and insert shelf
674 x 500 x 1,002
• Wood worktop 40 mm
• 1 wall cabinet - 845 x 300 x 400 mm
• 2 wall cabinets - 674 x 300 x 400 mm
• 3 perforated walls
Self-supporting structure

Also available with stainless steel worktop.


2,800 mm
4/16
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
STORAGE AND WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT 4
INTERIOR SYSTEMS

Einrichtungs-
systeme
4730281 280 modular workstation
system
• 1 locker - 610 x 530 x 2,000 mm
• 1 drawer cabinet - 845 x 500 x 1,002 mm

2.000 mm
9 drawers (8 x H 60, 1 x H 137 mm)
• 1 drawer cabinet - 674 x 500 x 1,002 mm
4 drawers (H 60 mm)
• Cabinet with 2 doors and insert shelf
674 x 500 x 1,002
• Wood worktop 40 mm
• 1 wall cabinet - 845 x 300 x 400 mm
• 2 wall cabinets - 674 x 300 x 400 mm
• 3 perforated walls
Self-supporting structure

2.800 mm
Also available with stainless steel worktop.

473517 Modulares-Arbeitsplatz-
System 280
• 1 locker - 610 x 530 x 2,000 mm
• 1 drawer cabinet, 9 drawers
• Wardrobe with 2 doors and single beds
• workshop wagon,7 drawers
• Wooden worktop 40 mm
• 1 hanging cabinet 845 x 300 x 400 mm
• 2 hanger cabinets 674 x 300 x 400 mm
• 3 perforated walls
Self-supporting construction

Also available with stainless steel worktop.

4730230 230 modular workstation


system
2.000 mm

• 1 locker - 610 x 530 x 2,000 mm


• 1 drawer cabinet - 845 x 500 x 1,002 mm
9 drawers (8 x H 60, 1 x H 137 mm)
• Cabinet with 2 doors and insert shelf
845 x 500 x 1,002 mm
• Wood worktop 40 mm
• 2 wall cabinets - 845 x 300 x 400 mm
• 2 perforated walls
Self-supporting structure

Also available with stainless steel worktop.

2.300 mm
Also available with stainless steel worktop.

4/17
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STORAGE AND WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT 4

systems
Interior
INTERIOR SYSTEMS

4731513 Arbeitsplatz-System
• 1 drawer cabinet with 4 drawers and door
• 1 wardrobe with 2 doors and single beds
• workshop wagon, 7 drawers
• Wooden worktop 40 mm
• 3 perforated walls
• Dimensions: L 2193 x W 530 x H 2000 mm
Self-supporting construction

Also available with


stainless steel worktop.

Further planning proposals:


4731504 Workstation system
• 1 drawer cabinet with 9 drawers
845 x 500 x 1,002 mm
• 2 drawer cabinets with 9 drawers
674 x 500 x 1.002 mm
• Wood worktop 40 mm
• 3 perforated walls
Self-supporting structure

Also available with stainless steel worktop.


4731501 Workstation system
• 1 drawer cabinet with 9 drawers
845 x 500 x 1,002 mm
• 1 drawer cabinet with 4 drawers and door
674 x 500 x 1,002 mm
• 1 cabinet with 2 doors and insert shelf
674 x 500 x 1.002 mm
• Wood worktop 40 mm
• 3 perforated walls
Self-supporting structure

Also available with stainless steel worktop.

4731511 Arbeitsplatz-System
• 1 drawer cabinet with 9 drawers
674 x 500 x 1002 mm
• 1 drawer cabinet with 4 drawers and door
674 x 500 x 1002 mm
• Wooden worktop 40 mm
• 3 perforated walls
Self-supporting construction

Also available with


stainless steel worktop.

Other combinations on request!


4/18
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
STORAGE AND WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT 4
INTERIOR SYSTEMS

Einrichtungs-
systeme
4731513 Arbeitsplatz-System
• 1 drawer cabinet with 9 drawers
• 1 wardrobe with 4 drawers and door
• Factory car, 7 drawers
• Wooden worktop 40 mm
• Dimensions: L 2193 x W 500 x H 1002 mm

Optional auch mit Edelstahl-Arbeitsplatte lieferbar.


4731506 Arbeitsplatz-System
• 1 drawer cabinet with 9 drawers 845 x
500
• 1 drawer cabinet with 9 drawers
674 x 500
• 1 wardrobe with 2 doors and single beds
• workshop wagon, 7 drawers
• Wooden worktop 40 mm
• Dimensions: L 2193 x W 500 x H 1002 mm

4731403 Workstation system


• 2 drawer cabinets with 9 drawers
845 x 500 x 1,002 mm
• Wood worktop 40 mm
• 2 perforated walls
Self-supporting structure

Also available with stainless steel worktop.


4731411 Workstation system
• 1 drawer cabinet with 9 drawers
845 x 500 x 1,002 mm
• 1 drawer cabinet with 4 drawers and door
845 x 500 x 1,002 mm
• Wood worktop 40 mm
• 2 perforated walls
Self-supporting structure

Also available with stainless steel worktop.

4731404 Workstation system


• 2 drawer cabinets with 9 drawers
845 x 500 x 1,002 mm
• Wood worktop 40 mm
Also available with stainless steel worktop.

4731406 Workstation system


• 1 drawer cabinet with 9 drawers
845 x 500 x 1,002 mm
• 1 drawer cabinet with 4 drawers and door
845 x 500 x 1,002 mm
• Wood worktop 40 mm

Also available with stainless steel worktop.

Other combinations on request! 4/19


The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
4
Workbench
STORAGE AND WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT
systems

WORKBENCH SYSTEMS

Table system in variable lengths


- Table system based on a modular principle
- variable and extensible
- Worktops made of multi-layered,
E M S
waterproof glued multiplex beech plywood
- Broken board edges
VE I T
- Polished surfaces treated with linseed oil varnish
NS I
- Complete delivery or delivery of the substructure
X P E
for existing tabletops
INE
Worktables
with 30 mm plywood boards

AT 1 design
Dimensions: 1,100 x 880 x 700 mm (L x H x D)
Bright galvanised underframe:
40102-00 With worktop

40103-00 Without worktop


Plastic-coated underframe, blue RAL 5010
Bright galvanised shelves:
40104-00 With worktop

40105-00 Without worktop

AT 2 design
Dimensions: 2,100 x 880 x 700 mm (L x H x D)
Bright galvanised underframe:
40106-00 With worktop

40107-00 Without worktop


Plastic-coated underframe, blue RAL 5010
Bright galvanised shelves:

40108-00 With worktop

40109-00 Without worktop

AT 3 design
Dimensions: 3,200 x 880 x 700 mm (L x H x D)
Bright galvanised underframe:

40110-00 With worktop (two-piece)

40111-00 Without worktop


Plastic-coated underframe, blue RAL 5010
Bright galvanised shelves:

40112-00 With worktop (two-piece)

40113-00 Without worktop

4/20
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
STORAGE AND WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT 4

systems
Perfo
PERFO SYSTEMS

Perfo® perforated plate


for wall or table mounting
Symmetrically perforated sheet steel plates
with reinforcing profiles on the back side.
Perforation: 9.2 x 9.2 mm, hole spacing: 38 mm RAL 5010 RAL 7016 RAL 7035
The hole spacing is maintained even when enzianblau anthrazitgrau lichtgrau
installing multiple plates stacked
side by side and on top of each other.

Dimensions

40304-00 1,981 x 457 mm

40303-00 1,486 x 457 mm

? ??

40302-00 991 x 457 mm

40301-00 495 x 457 mm

40311-00 37 PL range
(40-piece)
Scope of delivery:
20 hooks, 10 double hooks,
5 U-brackets, 1 screwdriver holder,
10 simp. tool clamps,
1 drill holder, 1 screw-wrench holder,
1 Allen key holder, 1 saw holder

40306-00 33 PL range
(20-piece)
Scope of delivery:
10 hooks, 1 screw-wrench holder,
1 saw holder, 1 Allen key holder,
1 drill holder, 1 screwdriver holder,
5 simp. tool clamps

4/21
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
4
Tool
STORAGE AND WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT
systems
module
Perfo

PERFO SYSTEMS
trolley

40306-50 PL - Sortiment 30
(11-teilig)
Lieferumfang:
5 Haken, 5 Doppelhaken,
1 Schraubenschlüsselhalter

40308-00 PL - 31 PL range
(15-piece)

40309-00 PL - 38 PL range
(60-piece)

40308-10 PL - Sortiment PL 20
(22-teilig)

Lieferumfang:
9 Schräghaken, 6 Doppelhaken,
7 einfache Werkzeugklemmen

40309-10 PL - Sortiment PL 42
(25-teilig)

Lieferumfang:
15 Haken, 10 Klemmen

4/22
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
STORAGE AND WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT 4

cabinets
Storage
STORAGE CABINETS
9000 Swing door wardrobe
449 599 Light gray / light gray (RAL 7035)
• Stable steel sheet construction
• High quality stove enamelling
• Reinforced wing doors
• H 1950 x W 950 x D 420 mm
• 4 galvanized shelves, height-adjustable
In a 35 mm grid
• Load capacity per floor 50 kg
• Doors with cylinder lock and rotary seal with 3-
point lock

9000 Swing door wardrobe


449 601 Light gray (RAL 7035) / anthracite gray (RAL 7016)
• same versions such as 9000 449 59

9000 Swing door wardrobe


449 602 Light gray (RAL 7035) / blue (RAL 5005)
• same versions such as 9000 449 59

4000 Double door cabinet


SMD 905G light grey/light grey (RAL 7035)
• welded sheet steel housing
• high grade lacquering
• reinforced double doors
• H 1,950 x W 950 x D 500 mm
• 4 galvanised shelves,
height adjustable in 25 mm increments
• load capacity per shelf 75 kg
• doors with cylinder lock
and 3-point locking

4000 Double door cabinet


SMD 905B charcoal grey/light grey
(RAL 7016/RAL 5012)
otherwise same design as described above

4000 Double door cabinet


SMD 905S light grey/graphite (RAL 7035/RAL 9011)
otherwise same design as described above

4/23
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
4
Storage
STORAGE AND WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT
cabinets

STORAGE CABINETS

4000 Locker
KLD421-2 • sturdy welded steel design
• high grade lacquering
• RAL 7035 light grey
• door with slats, punched label
frame and rotary locking bolt
• with 1 hat shelf and 1 hanging rail
with 3 sliding hooks
• 2 300-mm compartments
• H 1,850 x W 625 x D 500 mm
• with plinth (H 100 mm)

4000 Locker
KLD421-1 Design as described above but,
Height 1,850 mm
• with height-adjustable feet (H 150 mm)

More designs and colour combinations on request!

4000 Locker
KLD421-S1
• sturdy welded steel design
• high grade lacquering
• RAL 7035 light grey
• door with slats, punched label frame
and rotary locking bolt
• with 1 hat shelf and 1 hanging rail
with 3 sliding hooks
• 2 300-mm compartments
• H 2,100 x W 625 x D 500/800 mm
• sub-mounted, integrated bench seat
made of 30-mm square tube steel,
seat height 400 mm, seat depth 300 mm

More designs and colour combinations on request!

4/24
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
STORAGE AND WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT 4

Shelving
systems
SHELVING SYSTEMS
Standard shelf unit
Frame and bottoms galvanized, load capacity b. Evenly distributed load
150 kg, field load 1,000 kg
Basic shelf
H x W x D mm / No. of shelves
41273-00 2000 x 1000 x 300 / 5 41273-10 2500 x 1000 x 300 / 6
41274-00 2000 x 1000 x 400 / 5 41274-10 2500 x 1000 x 400 / 6
41275-00 2000 x 1000 x 500 / 5 41275-10 2500 x 1000 x 500 / 6
41276-00 2000 x 1000 x 600 / 5 41276-10 2500 x 1000 x 600 / 6

41273-20 3000 x 1000 x 300 / 7


41274-20 3000 x 1000 x 400 / 7
41275-20 3000 x 1000 x 500 / 7
41276-20 3000 x 1000 x 600 / 7

More shelving systems on request!


shelf unit
H x W x D mm / No. of shelves
41273-50 2000 x 1000 x 300 / 5
41274-50 2000 x 1000 x 400 / 5
41275-50 2000 x 1000 x 500 / 5
41276-50 2000 x 1000 x 600 / 5

41273-60 2500 x 1000 x 300 / 6 41273-70 3000 x 1000 x 300 / 7


41274-60 2500 x 1000 x 400 / 6 41274-70 3000 x 1000 x 400 / 7
41275-60 2500 x 1000 x 500 / 6 41275-70 3000 x 1000 x 500 / 7
41276-60 2500 x 1000 x 600 / 6 41276-70 3000 x 1000 x 600 / 7

Also available fully galvanised or with a light grey frame.

Wide-span shelf unit


• Large storage capacity in a small space
• Maximum shelf load capacity 400 kg
• quick assembly by simply inserting the modules
H x W x D mm / No. of shelves
415500-00 2000 x 1500 x 400 / 3
415580-00 2500 x 1500 x 400 / 4
415800-00 3000 x 1500 x 400 / 5

Shelf width: 2000, 2250 or 2500


as well as 500, 600 or 800 mm
depths available on request!

4/25
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
4
Storage STORAGE AND WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT
boxes

STORAGE BOXES

Boltless shelf unit


complete with 112 shelf boxes type 109
Design: bright-zinc coated support frame,
1 braced crossbar, 1 diagonal brace,
14 bright-zinc coated shelves with stop bead
Dimensions: Height: 1,850 mm,
base area width: 1,058 mm,
extension area width: 1,008 mm, shelf depths: 324 mm
112 storage boxes - 300 mm x 117 mm x 90 mm

43109-G Base area


43109-A Extension area
Boltless shelf unit
complete with 64 shelf boxes of all types
Design: bright-zinc coated support frame,
1 braced crossbar, 1 diagonal brace,
12 bright-zinc coated shelves with stop bead
Dimensions: Height: 1,850 mm,
base area width: 1,058 mm,
extension area width: 1,008 mm, shelf depths: 324 mm
32 Storage boxes type 109, 16 storage boxes type 209,
16 storage boxes type 214, (depth 300 mm)

404100-G Base area


404100-A Extension area

Artikel 404100 Artikel 43109

Storage boxes
Length 300 mm

Matching transverse and longitudinal dividers on request!


43109-B Type 109
Content: 2 l - Content load: 2 kg - Surcharge: 6 kg
Interior dimensions: 260 x 94 x 80 mm - Packing unit 16 pcs

43209-B Type 209


Content: 4.4 l - Content load: 5 kg - Surcharge: 15 kg
Interior dimensions: 256 x 211 x 80 mm - Packing unit 8 pcs

43214-B Type 214


Content: 7.1 l - Content load: 7 kg - Surcharge: 20 kg
Interior dimensions: 253 x 210 x 129 mm - Packing unit 6 pcs

Length 400 mm
44109-B Type 109
Content: 2.7 l - Content load: 3 kg - Surcharge: 9 kg
Interior dimensions: 360 x 94 x 80 mm - Packing unit 16 pcs

44209-B Type 209


Content: 6 l - Content load: 6 kg - Surcharge: 20 kg
Interior dimensions: 356 x 211 x 80 mm - Packing unit 8 pcs

44214-B Type 214


Content: 9.9 l - Content load: 10 kg - Surcharge: 30 kg
Interior dimensions: 353 x 210 x 129 mm - Packing unit 6 pcs

Length 500 mm
45109-B Type 109
Content: 3.5 l - Content load: 4 kg - Surcharge: 12 kg
Interior dimensions: 460 x 94 x 80 mm - Packing unit 16 pcs

45209-B Type 209


Content: 7.8 l - Content load: 8 kg - Surcharge: 25 kg
Interior dimensions: 456 x 211 x 80 mm - Packing unit 8 pcs

45214-B Type 214


Content: 12.6 l - Content load: 13 kg - Surcharge: 40 kg
Interior dimensions: 453 x 210 x 129 mm - Packing unit 6 pcs

4/26
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
STORAGE AND WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT 4

Small parts
cabinets
SMALL PARTS CABINETS

Accessories for storage boxes


cross section - made of transparent plastic
43158-80 suitable for storage boxes Type 109 mm
43159-00 suitable for storage boxes Type 209 mm
43159-10 suitable for storage boxes Type 214mm
longside dividers - stable longside dividers made of steel
43107-00 suitable for storage boxes Type 209 - 400 mm
43108-00 suitable for storage boxes Type 214 - 400 mm
Komplettregal
43108-10 suitable for storage boxes Type 209 - 500 mm
43108-20 suitable for storage boxes Type 214 - 500 mm

dust cover - made of transparent plastic


43112-60 suitable for storage boxes Type 109 - 300 mm
43112-70 suitable for storage boxes Type 209 / 214 - 300 mm
43112-80 suitable for storage boxes Type 109 - 400 mm
43112-90 suitable for storage boxes Type 209 / 214 - 400 mm
43113-00 suitable for storage boxes Type 109 - 500 mm
43113-10 suitable for storage boxes Type 209 / 214 - 500 mm

STORAGE AND WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT 4

Pallet rack
Pallet rack

42679-8N Pallet racks set


• 1 basic module2.700 mm Width
• 2 frame incl. Floor anchor
• 4 spars = 2 bearing planes
• 1 mounting module 2.700 mm Width
• 1 frame incl. Floor anchor
• 4 spars = 2 bearing planes
• shelf load: 1.590 kg
• Measurements
Height 3.000 x width 5.658 x depth 1.100 mm

42670-6N Pallet rack annex


• 1 anchoring module 2,700 mm width
• 1 frame incl. Floor anchor
• 4 spars = 2 bearing planes Delivered as dismantled - self-assembly.
• shelf load: 1.590 kg
• Measurements
Extensive accessories for pallet
Height 3,000 x Width 2,786 x Depth 1,100 mm racks on request!

Further designs on request.


4/27
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
4
Ttransport STORAGE AND WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT
trolleys

TRANSPORT TROLLEYS

47320-13 Service cart


• 3 drawers with ball bearing slides
• Front centralized safety lock
• 4x extra large wheels ø125mm, where
of 2x caster with rolling and turning brake
• Measurements: L860 x W500 x H1040 mm
• RAL black: 9004/ RAL grey: 9006
4000
818 175
Platform trolley
• with non-slip plastic mat
• 2 swivel and 2 fixed castors
• transport level with a soft protective band
• push handle rotatable by 90°
• load capacity 120 kg
• 830 x 480 x 740 mm

9000
444 128
Table trolley
• with 2 bases - loading surface L 850 x W 500 mm
• welded steel tube and profile steel
• powder-coated, dove blue RAL 5014
• permanent surface protection,
impact and scratch resistant
• loading surfaces consisting of wood-based
sheet material, beech-finished surface,
in an angular steel frame, edge 12 mm high
• 2 swivel lockable castors, 2 fixed castors
• solid rubber wheels, hubs with roller bearings
• wheel diameter 125 mm
• upper surface load capacity 80 kg
• total load capacity 250 kg
• delivered disassembled

404820-00 Table trolley with tray


• steel structure, welded
• steel tube bail and sheet steel bolted tray
• oil-tight tray, 40-mm high edge
• powder-coated RAL 5007
• 2 swivel and 2 fixed castors
• loading surface 850 x 500 mm

402722-00 Table trolley with tray


• steel structure, welded
• steel tube bail and sheet steel bolted tray
• oil-tight upper tray, 100-mm high edge
loosely laid grating, conical drain
and 1/2" drain tap
• oil-tight lower tray, 25-mm high edge
• 2 swivel and 2 fixed castors
• loading surface 1,000 x 600 mm

4/28
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
STORAGE AND WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT 4

Multi-tier
trolleys
MULTI-TIER TROLLEYS

408301-00 Multi-tier trolley


• welded steel tube and profile steel
• powder-coated, blue RAL 5007
• 1 fixed base and 3 insert shelves
made of load-bearing, rigid sandwich
panels, beech-finished surface
• 90-kg load capacity per insert shelf
• 2 swivel and 2 fixed castors,
hubs with roller bearings
• loading surface 1,000 x 600 mm,
total height 1,800 mm

408302-00 Multi-tier trolley


• design as described above but
• loading surface 1,000 x 700 mm,
total height 1,800 mm

408303-00 Multi-tier trolley


• design as described above but
• loading surface 1,200 x 800 mm,
total height 1,800 mm

408462-00 Multi-tier trolley


• welded steel tube and profile steel
• powder-coated, blue RAL 5007
• 1 fixed and 3 insert, foldable shelves.
3-piece boards made of waterproof plywood
with piano hinge at the folds, bolted to
support brackets. Support brackets provided
with snap toggle bolts securing the
foldable shelves.
• 90-kg load capacity per foldable shelf
• 2 swivel and 2 fixed castors, hubs with
roller bearings
• loading surface 1,000 x 700 mm,
total height 1,800 mm

408463-00 Multi-tier trolley


• design as described above but
• loading surface 1,200 x 800 mm,
total height 1,800

Multi-tier trolleys
in other designs, colours and sizes
are available on request!

4/29
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
4
Protection STORAGE AND WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT
mats

PROTECTION MATS

Workplace mats
for safety and a good climate
Not every workplace is protected against daily hazards:
Be it oil droplets falling on the ground, liquids leading to an
increased risk of slipping, or hard floors causing employees an
enormous physical burden due to prolonged standing
- disease-related absenteeism in the company is the result.

Effective remedy is provided by workplace mats.


For almost any situation in the workplace, we can offer
suitable mats.

e.g.
411010-00 Yoga Meter®
• height 9 mm
• grey / corrugated
• ergonomic properties
• easy to cut, adaptable everywhere
• made of vinyl
• width 91 cm, max. length 1,830 cm
• linear metre price

Numerous versions are available on request!

Dirt trap mats -


to make a good first impression
The first impression is of particular importance: this also applies
to the image of a company.

With dirt trap mats you can impress your customers and visitors
already in the entrance area of your building.
As these mats absorb dirt from outdoor footwear,
the door area looks neat and the whole building
does not get dirty so fast.

e.g.
432101-00 Two in One
• height 9 mm
• colour grey
• it absorbs dirt very well
• easy to clean
• extremely wear resistant
• long-chain olefin fibre on the vinyl backing
in addition to hard polypropylene slings
• width 91 cm x length 150 cm

Numerous standard designs and dirt trap mats with logo available.

4/30
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
LIFT PLATFORMS - WORKSTANDS - HOISTING CRANES 5

platforms
ECON LIFT PLATFORMS

Lift
LIFT PLATFORMS MADE BY ECON
60 cm
220 cm

Min. 18 cm
Max. 97 cm
350 KG

FH 350
Racing
220 cm

Min. 16 cm
Max. 120 cm

400 KG
70 cm

EH 400
Sport

220 cm

Min. 16 cm
Max. 120 cm
70 cm
530 KG

EH 530
Cruiser
5/01
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
5 LIFT PLATFORMS - WORKSTANDS - HOISTING CRANES

ECON
platforms

LIFT PLATFORMS
Lift

230 cm

Min. 16 cm
Max. 120 cm
80 cm

600 KG

EH 600
Max

LIFT PLATFORMS MADE BY ECON

30 cm 80 cm 30 cm

230 cm

Min. 16 cm
600 KG
Max. 120 cm

EH 600
140 cm

Quad

5/02
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
LIFT PLATFORMS - WORKSTANDS - HOISTING CRANES 5
ECON

platforms
LIFT PLATFORMS

Lift
ECON EH 400
Sport 220
cm

ECON platform lifts: the comfortable, safe and


fast way upwards.

Min. 17 cm - Max. 120 cm


EH 400 ECON platform is intended for all
sports motorcycles, tourers, enduro bikes
and scooters weighing up to 400 kg 70 cm
An elegant and solid structure
"Made by ECON (Germany)"

50000-00 ECON EH 400 Red


50000-01 ECON EH 400 Blue
Scissors-type construction, drive cover,
wheel cutout insert plate and safety
plate in SILVER

MADE BY ECON
Load capacity: 400 kg
Standard colours:
Large 220 x 70 cm
platform: RED - RAL 3000

Maximum
lifting height:
120 cm
BLUE - RAL 5010
400 KG
Drive on height: 16 cm
Drive: electrohydraulics
Drive power: 1.1 kW - 230 Volt
Control system: Hand button with
magnetic back side

Safety: normally closed


safety valve
- no mechanical
lock required -

Certification: CE
Standards: - Rear wheel cutout for
insertion under the platform
(60 x 34 cm)
- 8 maintenance-free ball bearings
- greasable pivot bolts
- removable front safety plate
- electrohydraulic drive
drive installed under the platform
with sheet steel cover
- ramp with ground sliding rail,
automatic move-in when
the platform is lifted
- 2 sockets in the cover of the
hydraulic unit
- Preparation for mounting a chassis

a wide range of accessories


can be found starting from page 5/08
5/03
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
5 LIFT PLATFORMS - WORKSTANDS - HOISTING CRANES

ECON
platforms

LIFT PLATFORMS
Lift

ECON EH 530
Cruiser 220
cm
ECON platform lifts: the comfortable, safe and
fast way upwards.
EH 530 ECON platform is intended for all

Min. 17 cm - Max. 120 cm


sport motorcycles, tourers, enduro bikes and
scooters weighing up to 530 kg
An elegant and solid structure 70 cm
"Made by ECON (Germany)"

50020-00 ECON EH 530 Red


50020-01 ECON EH 530 Blue
Scissors-type construction, drive cover,
wheel cutout insert plate and safety
plate in SILVER

MADE BY ECON
Load capacity: 530 kg Standard colours:
Large 220 x 70 cm
RED - RAL 3000
platform: BLUE - RAL 5010
Maximum
lifting height:
120 cm 530 KG
Drive on height: 16 cm
Drive: electrohydraulics
Drive power: 1.1 kW - 230 Volt
Control system: Hand button with
magnetic back side

Safety: normally closed


safety valve
- no mechanical
lock required -

Certification: CE
Standards: - Rear wheel cutout for
insertion under the platform
(60 x 34 cm)
- 8 maintenance-free ball bearings
- greasable pivot bolts
- removable front safety plate
- electrohydraulic drive
drive installed under the platform
with sheet steel cover
- ramp with ground sliding rail,
automatic move-in when
the platform is lifted
- 2 sockets in the cover of the
hydraulic unit
- Preparation for mounting a chassis

a wide range of accessories


can be found starting from page 5/08
5/04
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
LIFT PLATFORMS - WORKSTANDS - HOISTING CRANES 5
ECON

platforms
LIFT PLATFORMS

Lift
ECON EH 600
Max 230
cm
ECON platform lifts: the comfortable, safe
and fast way upwards.
EH 600 ECON platform is intended for all

Min. 17 cm - Max. 120 cm


sport motorcycles, tourers, enduro bikes and
scooters weighing up to 600 kg
80 cm
An elegant and solid structure
"Made by ECON (Germany)"

50050-00 ECON EH 600 Red


50050-01 ECON EH 600 Blue
Scissors-type construction, drive cover,
wheel cutout insert plate and safety
plate in SILVER

MADE BY ECON
Standard colours:
Load capacity: 600kg
RED - RAL 3000
Large 230 x 80 cm BLUE - RAL 5010
platform:

Maximum
lifting height:
120 cm 600 KG
Drive on height: 16 cm
Drive: electrohydraulics
Drive power: 1.1 kW - 230 Volt
Control system: Hand button with
magnetic back side

Safety: normally closed


safety valve
- no mechanical
lock required -

Certification: CE
Standards: - Rear wheel cutout for
insertion under the platform
(60 x 34 cm)
- 8 maintenance-free ball bearings
- greasable pivot bolts
- removable front safety plate
- electrohydraulic drive
drive installed under the platform
with sheet steel cover
- ramp with ground sliding rail,
automatic move-in when
the platform is lifted
- 2 sockets in the cover of the
hydraulic unit
- Preparation for mounting a chassis

a wide range of accessories


can be found starting from page 5/08
5/05
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
5 LIFT PLATFORMS - WORKSTANDS - HOISTING CRANES

ECON
platforms

LIFT PLATFORMS
Lift

ECON EH 600
Quad 30 cm 80 cm 30 cm

The EH 600 Quad by ECON has become a predominant 220


tool in the workshop. Load capacity, lifting height, cm

length and, last but not least, the width of the


platform significantly exceed standard measures.

Min. 17 cm - Max. 120 cm


The EH 600 Max extremely sturdy basic design has made
it possible to install wide side extensions (2 x 30 cm).
140 cm

50060-00 ECON EH 600 Red Quad


50060-01 ECON EH 600 Blue Quad
Scissors-type construction, drive cover,
wheel cutout insert plate and safety
plate in SILVER Side extension with
ramps in BLACK

Load capacity: 600 kg


Large 230 x 80 cm (without extension)
platform: 230 x 140 cm (with extension)

Maximum 120 cm
lifting height:

Drive on height: 16 cm
Drive: electrohydraulics
Drive power: 1.1 kW - 230 Volt
Control system: Hand button with
magnetic back side

Safety: normally closed


safety valve
- no mechanical
lock required -

Certification: CE
Standards: - Rear wheel cutout for
insertion under the platform
(60 x 34 cm)
- 8 maintenance-free ball bearings
- greasable pivot bolts
- removable front safety plate
- electrohydraulic drive
drive installed under the platform
with sheet steel cover
- ramp with ground sliding rail,
automatic move-in when
the platform is lifted Standard colours:
- 2 sockets in the cover of the RED - RAL 3000
hydraulic unit
BLUE - RAL 5010
- Preparation for mounting a chassis

a wide range of accessories


can be found starting
from page 5/08
600 KG
5/06
MADE BY ECON
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
LIFT PLATFORMS - WORKSTANDS - HOISTING CRANES 5
ECON

platforms
LIFT PLATFORMS

Lift
ECON FH 350
Racing
ECON platform lifts: the comfortable, safe and fast way upwards.

ECON FH 350 platform is the ideal platform in the inexpensive segment,


able to meet the demands of professionals. "Made by ECON (Germany)"

50230-00 ECON FH 350 Red


Scissors-type construction and safety
plate in SILVER

Standard colours:
RED - RAL 3000 350 KG
Load capacity: 350 kg

Large 220 x 60 cm
platform:

Maximum 97 cm
lifting height:

Drive on height: 18 cm

Drive: foot pump hydraulic system


with 1 m hose
Safety: - mechanical, base grid
- hydraulic punch with
built-in lowering throttle
for additional safety
Certification: CE
Standards: - 8 maintenance-free ball bearings
- greasable pivot bolts
- removable front safety plate
- ramp to be hooked to the platform
- preparation for mounting a chassis

220
cm
Min. 18 cm - Max. 96 cm

60 cm MADE
BY
ECON
All the accessories of the ECON EH 400/530
lift platforms can be used for this platform. 5/07
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
5 LIFT PLATFORMS - WORKSTANDS - HOISTING CRANES

ECON
platforms

LIFT PLATFORM ACCESSORIES


Lift

C-rail pair
with infinitely adjustable lashing lugs and holding
eyelets and to accommodate more add-on pieces.
It can be locked in each position in the rail.

50000-20 For EH 400,EH 530, FH 350


and EH 600
- Length 220 cm

50050-15 Short tool /


material tray
Standard colour SILVER
50 cm long, completely movable along
the entire platform length.
Installation in combination with C-rail

50050-60 Channelled sheet


aluminium
for centre and side stands
to be used with EH 400 Sport, EH 530 Cruiser
or FH 350 Racing.
60 x 60 cm with holes for assembly
on the platform board

50050-61 Channelled sheet


aluminium
for centre and side stands
to be used with EH 600 Max or EH 600 Quad
79 x 60 cm with holes for assembly
on the platform board

50050-65 The channelled sheet


aluminium for ramp
is suitable for all
ECON EH + FH lift platforms

5/08
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
LIFT PLATFORMS - WORKSTANDS - HOISTING CRANES 5
ECON

platforms
LIFT PLATFORM ACCESSORIES

Lift
50050-66 Extension for
ramp 50 x 60 cm
(5 mm thick channelled sheet aluminium)
suitable for all
ECON EH lift platforms

50050-17 Compressed air connection


for ECON EH platform
it consists of an elbow for bolting to the sheet metal
housing (holes are provided), plug-in nipple for connecting
a supply line in or on the ground, corrugated hose to the
platform board with upper plug connector for tyre inflator,
compressed air screwdriver, blowgun, etc.

Laying of an electric line and


a compressed air supply line
on or in the ground through
reserve conduits.
A simple, efficient and
cost-effective solution.

50000-30 Bogie for ECON-EH


lift platforms
(roller set = 4 pieces)
for installation on
FH 350 Racing
EH 400 Sport
EH 530 Cruiser
EH 600 Max
EH 600 Quad

5/09
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
5 LIFT PLATFORMS - WORKSTANDS - HOISTING CRANES

ECON
platforms

LIFT PLATFORM ACCESSORIES


Lift

50050-70 Holding eyelets


and lashing lugs
Set = 4 pcs, for mounting on the
platform board.

If they interfere, just remove them

Just press the button

Fixing holes provided in the


platform board.

Unlocking device
and ratchet

90120-00 Automatic
fastening strap
As car safety belts, this lashing strap can be
pulled out, as well as secured and tightened
with the ratchet. No more straps mess, always
clean and tidy.
It can be bolted or mounted using hooks.

For fastening on the platform or during transport.

Scope of delivery: 1 piece

50050-30 Side extension for


EH 600 (pair)
Width 300 mm on each side.
Also large vehicles such as quads have space.
Overall width incl. platform 1400 mm.
Delivery incl. ramps and fastening screws

Standard colour BLACK

50632-70 Front extension


for EH 600
300 mm

Standard colour BLACK

800 m
5/10 m
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
LIFT PLATFORMS - WORKSTANDS - HOISTING CRANES 5
ECON

platforms
LIFT PLATFORM ACCESSORIES

Lift
405 mm

50208-01 300-kg jack

15
0
m
m
Sscissor jack with 4-mm

Max 310 mm
Min. 85 mm
rubber support plate

Lifting height approx. 31 cm

For work on the platform lift

MADE BY ECON 50-mm stabilisation angle for


screwing on the right and left

50208-03 Adapter set


for 300-kg jack (50208-01)

It consists of
- 2 adapter holding fixtures
- 2 short Y-adapters
- 2 long Y-adapters
- 1 adapter plate

50000-40 Receiving tray for


300 kg Jack (50208-01)
• able to work under pressure till 100 kg
• Facilitates, for example, the removal or
installation of the rear wheel
• Unloading the axle by lifting
the rear wheel
Delivered without Lever and Adapter!

MADE BY ECON
5/11
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
5 LIFT PLATFORMS - WORKSTANDS - HOISTING CRANES

ECON
platforms

LIFT PLATFORM ACCESSORIES


Lift

50120-00 Assembly crane


Dismountable crane with castors allows
lifting with a permanently installed cable
pull. Can be used both over the stage
and over the transport crate.

internal width 1.120 mm


load capacity 300 kg
overall height 2.480 mm

Complete suspension of the motorcycle is


possible. The stage is free when the repair
can not be carried out completely.

50121-00 Assembly crane-E


Same as mounting crane 50120-00 but
instead of hand crank with
Electric cable

internal width 1.120 mm


load capacity 300 kg
overall height 2.480 mm

MADE BY ECON

50231-00 Foot pump hydraulical


for all standard lifting platforms

Delivery line 14 ccm, max. 200 bar at


80 kg pedallast.

Connection thread with cone 1/4


", oil content approx. 1.5 ltr.

Delivery is done with oil filling.

5/12
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
LIFT PLATFORMS - WORKSTANDS - HOISTING CRANES 5

platforms
ECON LIFT PLATFORM ACCESSORIES

Lift
50649-01 Wheel support
with crank handle
To quickly and firmly lock the front wheel.
Suitable for all platforms.

For ECON EH platforms,


suitable assembly holes
are provided in the platform board.

MADE BY ECON
Front part
complete
50646-40 Front wheel holder to removable.
with automatic clamping
For transport or on the lifting platform,
simply retract and the motorcycle stands
without additional mounts.
• Wheel size adjustable

MADE BY ECON

50647-00 Pneumatic wheel holder


For self-assembly on the platform lift.
The motorcycle is firm and secured.

Wheel holder controlled via hand valve


and hand locking.

50855-50 Partially pneumatic


wheel holder
To be used on ModuLift lift platforms

5/13
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
5 LIFT PLATFORMS - WORKSTANDS - HOISTING CRANES

ECON
platforms

LIFT PLATFORMS
Lift

ECON
The modular lift series for many applications
in the motorcycle, scooter, quad or driver workshop.
Two in one.
All 6 parts pieces can be rearranged individually.
The middle part can be hung.
Comfortable work on the engine, oil change, etc.; 4 wheel and 2 wheel platform.
Quick change of the platform width guaranteed!

50856-00
MOP 1000 - Compressed air drive
Min. width: 800 mm
Max. width: 1,300 mm
Length: 2,300 mm
Lifting height: 1,000 mm
Load capacity: 400 kg

50859-00
MOH 1000 - Electro-hydraulics
Min. width: 800 mm
Max. width: 1.300 mm
Length: 2.300 mm
Lifting height: 1.000 mm
Load capacity: 500 kg

50855-00
MOP 1200 - Compressed air drive
Min. width: 800 mm
Max. width: 1,300 mm
Length: 2,300 mm
Lifting height: 1,200 mm
Load capacity: 600 kg

50858-00
MOH 1200 - Electro-hydraulics
Min. width: 800 mm
Max. width: 1.300 mm
Length: 2.300 mm
Lifting height: 1.200 mm
Load capacity: 600 kg

5/14
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
LIFT PLATFORMS - WORKSTANDS - HOISTING CRANES 5
ECON

platforms
LIFT PLATFORMS

Lift
ECON Two in one.
All 6 parts pieces can be rearranged individually.
The middle part can be hung.
Comfortable work on the engine, oil change, etc.; 4 wheel and 2 wheel platform.

Maximum width up to max. 1.50 m - load capacity 600 or 1200 kg

50865-00
MOP 1200XL - Compressed air drive
Min. width: 900 mm
Max. width: 1.500 mm
Length: 2.500 mm
Lifting height: 1.230 mm
Load capacity: 600 kg

50865-50
MOH 1200XL - Electro-hydraulics
Min. width: 900 mm
Max. width: 1.500 mm
Length: 2.500 mm
Lifting height: 1.230 mm
Load capacity: 600 kg

50860-00
MOH 1400 - Electro-hydraulics
Min. width: 900 mm
Max. width: 1,500 mm
Length: 2,500 mm
Lifting height: 1,400 mm
Load capacity: 1,200 kg

50864-00
KIT for three-wheeled vehicles
suitable for 50860-00 and 50863-00
platforms

5/15
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
5 LIFT PLATFORMS - WORKSTANDS - HOISTING CRANES

ECON
platforms

LIFT PLATFORMS
Lift

2.000 mm

50905-50 ModuLift MOH 2000


Techn. Data: 1.100 mm
max. Load capacity: 2 Tonnes
Length: 2.600 mm
width of lane: 450 mm
min. width: 1.400 mm

1.700 mm
max. width: 2.000 mm
drive-on height: 210 mm
Lifting height: 1.700 mm
min. width between running rail: 500 mm
max. width between running rail: 1.100 mm
Weight: 890 kg
Drive voltage: 230V - 50 Hz, 16A
Compressed air connection: 6 - 8 bar

closed
Plattform 500 mm

mm
2.600
1.
40
0
m

Options:
m

• KIT for three-wheeled vehicles


• Extension for running rail

50902-00 Single-post platform


ES1000
Platform with electric drive (400 volt)
For all larger vehicles, such as quads, ATVs,
mowers or minicars. The jibs can be exactly
adjusted on the centre distance
and track width of the vehicle.
The vehicle is then lifted or simply moved.

Work can be easily performed on substructures,


differentials or mowing devices,
as it is possible to stand under the platform.

Height: 2,635 mm
Width: 1,900 mm
Depth: 2,230 mm
Centre distance: 880 - 2,100 mm
Lifting height: 1,750 mm
Load capacity: 1,000 kg
Drive: Electric 400 volts

50901-00 Disc holding fixture kit


for ES1000,
4 pads Æ 130 mm

5/16
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
LIFT PLATFORMS - WORKSTANDS - HOISTING CRANES 5

Workstands
ECON WORKSTANDS

Mounting sleeves
For workstands with Y-holders, mounting sleeve
with thread, mostly present in sport motorcycles.

50203-05 M 6
50203-06 M 8
50203-07 M 10 M 10 M6 M8

50210-00 Workstand Y-Aufnahme


ECON SILVER LINE
REAR STAND with L-holder
The most ELEGANT among the workstands.
Made of sturdy steel tubing and silver powder-coated.
4 castors provide stable standing, even when jacking up.
A highlight in design and function.
L-holder completely rubberised
Height 32 cm, width 36 cm L-Aufnahme
50210-50 Workstand
ECON SILVER LINE
REAR STAND with Y (racing) holder
Technology and dimensions as article 50210-00

Besondere Ständer für besondere Bikes.

50211-00 Workstand Anwendungs-


beispiel
ECON SILVER LINE
for the left-sided swinging arm
without arbour
50211-01 Triumph arbour
for Speed Triple, Sprint ST, 955 Daytona

50211-02 Honda arbour


for VFR

50211-03 Ducati arbour


for all models except 1098

50211-04 42-mm arbour


for all MV Agusta and Ducati 1098

50211-05 BMW arbour


for K 1200 S, R, GT

50211-06 Ducati arbour


for 1098, 40 mm Ø

50211-07 Honda arbour


CB 1000 R

Besondere Ständer für besondere Bikes.


5/17
Die Abbildungen können Sonderausstattungen zeigen die nicht zum Lieferumfang gehören.
Abbildungen, Beschreibungen, Farben und Maße sind unverbindlich und dienen nur der Veranschaulichung. Änderungen behalten wir uns vor.
5
Workstands
LIFT PLATFORMS - WORKSTANDS - HOISTING CRANES

WORKSTANDS ECON

50211-50 Workstand
ECON SILVER LINE
for the right sided swinging arm
without arbour
50211-51 Ducati arbour
suitable for disassembling transmission wheels

50211-52 BMW arbour


for F650 CS, F800 S/ST

50211-53 BMW arbour


for R1200 GS

Pin
50212-10 Workstand holding
fixture
ECON SILVER LINE
FRONT STAND with pin holding fixture
Holding fixture under the fork

Adapter
with rollers
50212-15 Workstand
ECON SILVER LINE
FRONT STAND with roller adapter
Holding fixture under the fork
ght
hei

Workstand
e in

50212-00
ECON SILVER LINE
abl

FRONT STAND - Holding fixture under


ust

the fork crown


Adj

Complete with 6 adapters:


13, 15, 17, 18, 20 and 27 mm Ø

5/18
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
LIFT PLATFORMS - WORKSTANDS - HOISTING CRANES 5

Workstands
ECON WORKSTANDS

50200-00 Workstand
ECON PRO
REAR STAND with L holder
Dismountable workstand made of sturdy,
blue steel tubing.

Adjustable width.

L holder completely rubberised.

IMPORT MODEL

50200-10 Workstand
ECON PRO
REAR STAND with Y holder
Dismountable workstand made of sturdy,
blue steel tubing.

Adjustable width.

For mounting sleeves,


please refer to page 5/17!

IMPORT MODEL

50200-20 Workstand
ECON PRO
Front stand with PIN holding fixtures
for under the fork.

Dismountable workstand made of sturdy,


blue steel tubing.

Adjustable width.

IMPORT MODEL

5/19
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
5
Assembly lifters and LIFT PLATFORMS - WORKSTANDS - HOISTING CRANES
transport means

ASSEMBLY LIFTERS AND


TRANSPORT MEANS
ECON
50611-00 Chopper and
quad lifter
- Skid length: 330 mm Removable
- Skid width: 60 mm manoeuvring handle
- Skid distance centre: 300 mm
- Lifting height: 430 mm
- min. height: 100 mm
- 2 lockable castors
- Removable manoeuvring handle
- Lifter with safety belt
- Pump lever (lift)
- Lever (lower)
- Safety grid
- Load capacity: 650 kg

90320-00 Aluminium
ramp
foldable to a 117.5-cm length
Light and sturdy
Length: 2,250 mm
Width: 310 mm
max. workload: 340 kg

50646-30 Front wheel holder with


automatic clamping
for transport, or on the lift platform:
just mount the motorcycle up and it will stand
without additional workstand.

Extra secure for transport.

90131-00 Front wheel holder


Tyre width up to 130 mm,
delivery without fixing material

Application
example
Illustration similar
5/20
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
LIFT PLATFORMS - WORKSTANDS - HOISTING CRANES 5
ECON

Transport
safety
TRANSPORT SAFETY

50646-45 Front wheel holder with


automatic clamping
For transporters or trailers.
• 2,2 mt . rail
• 2 Slides with screws for fastening the front
wheel holder to the rail
• 2 Slides with lashing lug
• 3 Mounting plate

MADE BY ECON
90110-20 ECON
Handle bar tension belt
Easy and secure motorcycle transport.

The belt is simply pushed through the handle


bar ends and tightened.
The motorcycle is tied down right and left with
a tension belt and is absolutely safe, with no
damage to the fairing, etc.

90110-50 Double loop strap (pair)


made of black nylon
As an extension or for tying on the
fork crown or swingarm to secure
the motorcycle
Width: 25 mm, length: 45 cm

50648-01 Fastening strap with


hooks and ratchet
Length 200 cm, width 2.5 cm

5/21
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
5 LIFT PLATFORMS - WORKSTANDS - HOISTING CRANES

ECON
platforms

LIFT PLATFORMS
Lift

2-post lift
•FREE-LINE concept at 3,2 and 4 t lifts: With optional
accessories upgradable on each 3,2 and 4 t lifts
• High-quality and rugged electro-hydraulic 2-post lift
•Asymmetric lifting arms (short - long) or symmetric lifting arms
(long - long) also optionally available as an accessory
• Powder coated lift
• Automatically unlocking of lifting arm blocking
•Multifunctional operating range by three-part telescopic lifting
arms optionally in asymmetric (short – long) version or
in symmetric (long – long) version, each with double-telescopic lift
ing plates (0 -98 mm) and twist protection
• Electromagnetic safety locking system
• Trouble-free and secure synchronization with 10 mm pull ropes
• Lifting limit and CE-Stop switches
• Band-cover for protection of cylinders, chains and ropes inclusive

Recording area support arms


ECO 2.28 H3 ECO 2.32 H3
2,8 t 3,2 t

ECO 2.35 H3 ECO 2.40 H3


3,5 t 4,0 t

ECO 2.40 H3-L


4,0 t
max

kg 400V
max ?

2800 kg ca. 45/42 200mm / (3 ~) Anwendungs-


2000 mm 3130 mm 2,2 kW 3C16 A 600 - 720 kg
- 4000 kg sec. C20/25 400V/50Hz beispiel
Abb. ähnlich
5/22
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
LIFT PLATFORMS - WORKSTANDS - HOISTING CRANES 5
ECON

platforms
LIFT PLATFORMS

Lift
2-post lift
•FREE-LINE concept at 3,2 and 4 t lifts: With optional
accessories upgradable on each 3,2 and 4 t lifts
• Long post extension with cross beam; synchronization ropes
and hydraulic hose are installed in the cross beam
• High-quality and rugged electro-hydraulic 2-post lift
• Powder coated lift
• Electromagnetic safety locking system
• Asymmetric lifting arms (short - long) or symmetric lifting arms
(long - long) also optionally available as an accessory
• Automatically unlocking of lifting arm blocking
• Trouble-free and secure synchronization with 10 mm pull ropes
• Lifting limit and CE-Stop switches
• Band-cover for protection of cylinders, chains and ropes inclusive

Recording area support arms

ECO 2.28 HL3 ECO 2.32 HL3


2,8 t 3,2 t

ECO 2.35 HL3 ECO 2.40 HL3


3,5 t 4,0 t

ECO 2.40 HL3-L


4,0 t
max

kg 400V
max ?

2800 kg ca. 45/42 200mm / (3 ~)


2000 mm 4030 mm 2,2 kW 3C16 A 630 - 750 kg
- 4000 kg sec. C20/25 400V/50Hz

5/23
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
5 LIFT PLATFORMS - WORKSTANDS - HOISTING CRANES

ECON
platforms

LIFT PLATFORMS
Lift

ECO RSH 3000


Tyre service scissor lift platform
• Tyre service scissor lift platform - versatile
and space-saving
• Without disturbing, rigid transverse connection
between the holding rails
• With mechanical tilt lever system allowing for
lifting from below at full power
• Pneumatically unlockable mechanical safety catches
• Synchronisation control with lifting and
command cylinder
• Integrated light barrier to permanently control
the lift synchronisation
• Receiving area enlargement through ramps
lockable in position
• Low drive-over height of 105 mm
• Signal sound and CE stop

Type RSH3000
Load capacity 3,000 kg
Lifting/lowering time approx. 19/19 sec
Elevation/drive-over height approx. 105 mm
Air connection 8 bar
Concrete strength / quality 250 mm / C20/25
Drive power 2.20 kW
Drive voltage (3~ ) 400 V / 50 Hz
Fuse protection 3C16 A
Weight 570 kg

ECO RSH 3000M


Tyre service scissor lift platform
•Movable without problems because of the mobile set
•Mobile mid-rise lift with mechanical synchronization by
crossbeam connections on the ground
• Automatic electromagnetic safety locking-system
• With mechanical rocker arm system, in order to
lift with full power
• Platform extension by fixable ramps on both sides

kg ?
max

3000 kg ca. 20/28 105 - MOBILE -----------


sec. 960 mm

230V

2,2 kW 230V/50Hz 3C16 A 490 kg

5/24
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
LIFT PLATFORMS - WORKSTANDS - HOISTING CRANES 5

platforms
ECON LIFT PLATFORMS

Lift
ECO 1.25S2
1-post lift
• High-quality fixed hydraulic 1-post lift
• Perfect lift for painting jobs and bodywork, brakes
and tire service
• Small work space requirements
• Automatic electromagnetic safety locking-system,
no double mechanical lowering operation
• Telescopic arms with adapter extensions

max

kg
max ?

2500 kg ca. 36/34 120 - 200mm /


sec. 1900 mm C20/25 2880 mm

400V

(3 ~)
2,2 kW 3C16 A 680 kg
400V/50Hz

ECO 1.25M2
1-post lift
• High-quality mobile hydraulic 1-post lift
• Perfect lift for painting jobs and bodywork, brakes
and tire service
• Small work space requirements
• Automatic electromagnetic safety locking-system,
no double mechanical lowering operation
• Telescopic arms with adapter extensions
max

kg
max ?

2500 kg ca. 36/34 120 - 200mm /


C20/25 2880 mm
sec. 1900 mm

400V

(3 ~)
2,2 kW 3C16 A 720 kg
400V/50Hz

5/25
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
5 LIFT PLATFORMS - WORKSTANDS - HOISTING CRANES

ECON
platforms

LIFT PLATFORMS
Lift

ECO 4.55 4-Post lift


•4-post lift for passenger cars and vehicles with
long wheelbase
• For automotive repairs and headlamp beam setting
•With flat platforms and rails for an
optional rolling jack
• Notch system for adjusting the platforms
• Pneumatic unlocking of notches

Type
kg
max ?

4.55 5500 kg ca. 45/42 200mm /


1760 mm C20/25 8 bar
sec.

Type
400V

(3 ~)
4.55 2,2 kW 3C16 A 1320 kg
400V/50Hz

Maße / Dimensions
Type L1 L2 H1 H2 H3

4.55 6288 5190 2370 1840 196

Type W1 W2 W3 W4 W5
1860 - 800 -
4.55 3324 2724
2160
490
1100

ECO AF2000P
Rolling jack
• Rolling Jack with extendable platforms
• Mechanical security system with spring-bearing rolls
• Lowering two-handed

ECO AF2500P
Rolling jack Type
• Rolling Jack with extendable platforms kg
max
• Mechanical security system with spring-bearing rolls
• Loweringtwo-handed AF 2000P 2000 kg 8 bar 95 kg

AF 2500P 2500 kg 8 bar 95 kg

5/26
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
LIFT PLATFORMS - WORKSTANDS - HOISTING CRANES 5

and lifting devices


Workshop cranes
ECON WORKSHOP CRANES
AND LIFTING DEVICES

50109-10 Engine crane foldable


• 2-speed hydraulic pump with chromed ram
rotates up to 135 degrees ensuring the optimal
working position
• Fine adjustment lowering handle with dead
man&rsquo s control prevents from rapid
uncontrolled lowering of load
• Nylon wheels avoid floor damage
• Arm has 3 pre-set positions for lifting. Easy to
maneuver in open or closed position due to unique
supporting wheels at the front of the base plate
• Static lifting capacity: 1000 kg
• Weight: 71 kg
• Measurements folded: L1499mm X B90mm X H1405mm

9000
443 602 Pallet truck
• Torsion-resistant, robust steel construction
• Surface protection by high-quality powder coating
• Ergonomic drawbar head with the functions
of lifting - driving - lowering
• Low maintenance hydraulic system with overload protection
• Adjustable lowering speed
• Entry rollers for easy entry into the wide
side of euro pallet
• Steering wheels: solid rubber
• Fork wheels: Polyurethane / Tandem
Safe working load: 2,5 t
Carrying width : 545 mm
Fork length : 1.150 mm
Lowered height : 85 mm
Lift height : 200 mm

9000
443 370 Scissor pallet truck
• manual hydraulic
• can be used as a fork lift truck and elevating platform
• 1-phase hydraulic system
• hydraulic system with safety valve
• adjustable lowering speed
• rapid lift for loads of up to 250 kg
• high-quality multiple powder coatings,
pigeon blue, RAL 5014

Safe working load: 1,0 t


Carrying width : 540 mm
Fork length : 1.150 mm
Lowered height : 85 mm
Lift height : 800 mm

5/27
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
5 LIFT PLATFORMS - WORKSTANDS - HOISTING CRANES

ECON
Jacks

JACKS

50501-00 Jack 1,5t.


Aluminium
• Weight reduced by aluminum construction
• min Height: 125 mm
• max. Height: 340 mm
• Length: 492m m
• Width: 230 mm
• Weight: 9,2 Kg
• front wheels: Ø 65 mm
• castors: Ø 40 mm
• with practical carrying handle

50502-00 Jack 2,5t.


Aluminium-Steel
• Double piston mechanism
• stable and lightweight aluminum steel construction
• min Height: 100 mm
• max. Height: 460 mm
• rear Height: 155 mm
• Length: 640 mm
• Width: 285 mm
• Weight: 26,6 Kg
• front wheels: Ø 65 mm
• castors: Ø 45 mm

50503-00 Manoeuvring
Jack 3,0t.
• for lifting and maneuvering vehicles
• 4 metal rollers, 2 of which are castors
• max. load capacity: 3.000 Kg
• lifting height: 140 - 520 mm
• Weight: 36,5 K
• dimensions: L660 x B344 x H180 mm
(Height without lifting tube)

50504-00 Manoevring
Jack 3,0t.
• professional quality
• Castors made of metal
• Lever tube cover prevents damage
to the vehicle
• load capacity: 3t
• Min Height: 13
• Max Height: 49
• Length: 72
• Width: 36
• Weight: 41k

5/28
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
LIFT PLATFORMS - WORKSTANDS - HOISTING CRANES 5

transport aids
ECON

Jacks and
JACKS AND
TRANSPORT AIDS

50510-00 Farm Jack


• especially for off-road vehicles with a
high ground clearance
• allows easy lifting, even when lifting on soft underground
• has a setback locking mechanism for actuating tube
• lifting capacity (max): 400 kg
• lifting height: min. 130 mm to max. 930 mm
• weight: 14.5 kg

50511-00 Hydraulic Jack 5t.


• spindle length: 70 mm
• stroke: 127 mm
• min. height: 216 mm
• max. height: 413 mm

50512-00 Hydraulic Jack 12t.


• spindle length: 80 mm
• stroke: 155 mm
• min. height: 230 mm
• max. height: 465 mm

50568-00 Aluminium sack trolley - ECSTK


• sack trolley made of aluminium
• incl. non-slip stair edge made of plastic
• wide aluminium scoop
• very light and handy
• wheels with pneumatic tyres and plastic rims
Load capacity: 120 kg
Size: 1,000 x 450 x 440 mm
Wide scoop: 235 mm mm
Tyre Ø / thickness: 254 mm / 63,5 mm
Rim Ø: 76.2 mm
Weight: 7.2 kg

5/29
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
5
Small crane
LIFT PLATFORMS - WORKSTANDS - HOISTING CRANES

ECON
system

SMALL CRANE SYSTEM

Ceiling fixing Transport carrier

Line carrier

End stop

Application example

50560-00 3-m crane runway with


electric wire rope hoist
• tailored complete solution with standard components
• optimal space usage thanks to low overall heights
• lightweight and easy to assemble
• extensive expansion and application possibilities
• galvanised material
• maximum load 500 kg (load capacity per metre
at a support distance of about 1 m)
• running rail 65 mm width, 60 mm height For every application the right profile.

50561-00 6-m crane runway with


electric wire rope hoist
• tailored complete solution with standard components
• optimal space usage thanks to low overall heights
• lightweight and easy to assemble
• extensive expansion and application possibilities
• galvanised material
• maximum load 500 kg (load capacity per metre at a
support distance of about 1 m)
• running rail 65 mm width, 60 mm height

More crane runways versions


individual planning possible and extensions are available on request!
5/30
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
OIL AND PETROL SUPPLY 6
INFORMATION

Who lubricates well, drives well! An old but true saying.


Oil must be appropriately stored, and used oil must be collected.
An advanced system with selected products ensures flawless functionality
for quite a long time. We can make you a complete offer.
Fresh oil supply from the drum or tank as a calibratable or non calibratable system!
If manual flow counters are used, the entire system must be calibratable.
Calibratable means that the equipment must be calibrated by the Office of Weights
and Measures. If no manual flow counter is used, a calibratable tin jug must be used,
e.g. with an oil dispensing system (dispensing tap).

ECON - FRESH OIL SUPPLY - DRUM Line to reel


or oil dispensing
WITH COMPRESSED AIR-FEED PUMP system

Compressed
air oil pump

Pressure reducing
valve with ball cock
Oil
pressure line

Pressure air supply line

Drum rack 2 x 60 l
Art. no. 60250-11

ECON - USED OIL DISPOSAL - TANK


Outside Approved oil
catch basins
Vent line
Suction line for tank
vehicle connection
Level indicator
Used oil filling hopper
with lid and strainer

Hole for padlock

Warning device,
leak warning display

Oil catch basins


Art. no.: 60113-00

700- or 1,000-l
used oil tank

Used oil container


Art. no.: 60112-00

6/01
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
6
Fresh oil supply
OIL AND PETROL SUPPLY
with drums

FRESH OIL SUPPLY


WITH DRUMS

60228-00 Hand Truck


300 kg, alternatively with solid rubber or air tires

Steel pipe welded, powder coated,


Blue RAL 5007, permanently surface-protected.
Hubs with roller bearing.
Suitable for all 200 liter barrels with edge.

60229-00 Hand Truck


300 kg, height 1600 mm, with 2 support
wheels, alternatively with solid rubber or air
tires
Steel pipe welded, powder coated,
Blue RAL 5007, permanently surface-protected.
Hubs with roller bearing.
Suitable for all 200 liter barrels with edge. In
addition with 2 support wheels solid rubber

60229-50 Barrel roller


250 kg, internal diameter 610 mm

Welded flat steel construction, cross-braced


downwards Ø 420 mm
for 60 ltr. Drums, outer ring inner Ø 610 mm for
200 ltr. Drums. Powder coated, blue RAL 5007. 4
castors, 2 pieces with fixation, wheels polyamide,
hubs with sliding bearing, wheel size 80 x 35 mm.

These mobile oil trolleys for 60- or 200-litre drums


are made of galvanised sheet steel in an ergonomic
and sturdy design for everyday use.
It can be combined with catch basins.

60230-02 Mobile drum trolley


Mod. ÖAM 60/1
- with two castors Æ 150 mm and 2 swivel castors Æ
75 mm
- trolley without drum and pump, etc.
- dimensions approx. 460 x 490 x 970 mm (LxWxH), 12 kg
- for 60-litre drums

60221-53 Mobile drum trolley


Mod. ÖAM 200/1
- with two castors Æ 180 mm and 2 swivel castors Æ
75 mm
- trolley without drum and pump, etc.
- dimensions approx. 460 x 490 x 930 mm (LxWxH), 20 kg
- for 200-litre drums

6/02
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
OIL AND PETROL SUPPLY 6

Fresh oil supply


with drums
FRESH OIL SUPPLY
WITH DRUMS

60240-05 Oil pump hand lever


Model AF 10
- for diesel, heating oil, lubricating oils up to max. 150 mm²/s
- polypropylene, NBR seal
- discharge tube, plastic telescopic suction pipe for
50-to-200-litre drums, 2" connection thread
- approx. 0.25 l / pull

AF10

60240-27 Oil pump Model HP700


- for diesel, heating oil, thin lubricants
- aluminium, NBR seal
- discharge tube, jug footprint with overflow collector,
steel suction hose for 50-to-200-litre drums,
2" connection thread
- approx. 0.5 l / lift, delivery without measuring jug

HP700
60240-04 Oil pump Model HP840
- for diesel, heating oil, thin lubricating oils
- aluminium, NBR seal
- delivery hose DN 18 x 1.5 m with outlet pipe,
shutter possibility, steel suction hose for 50-200 litres.
Drums, 2" connection thread
- approx. 0.3 l / pull

HP840

60271-45 Liquid level indicator


for 200-litre drums

Catch basins for oil and parts cleaner fluid

60250-01 Model W 10
Catch basin with grid and feet, galvanised
- 210-l tray volume
- max. load capacity 500 kg, weight approx. 70 kg
- size approx. 800 x 1,200 x 325 mm (LxWxH)
- for 2 x 200-l drums

60250-03 Model W 12
Catch basin with grid and feet, galvanised
- 270-l tray volume
- max. load capacity 1,000 kg, weight approx. 95 kg
- size approx. 1200 x 1600 x 240 mm (LxWxH)
- for 4 x 200-l drums

6/03
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
6
Fresh oil supply
OIL AND PETROL SUPPLY
with drums

FRESH OIL SUPPLY


WITH DRUMS
Drum shelf unit
Für die umweltgerechte Lagerung von
Originalgebinden mit wassergefährdenden
Flüssigkeiten wie Motoröl, Getriebeöl,
Hydrauliköl und ähnliche Flüssigkeiten.

60100-00 Modell Kombi 1


• for 2 x 60 Ltr.- barrels
• 60 Ltr.-Capacity for oil

60101-00 Modell Kombi 2


• for 1 x 60 Ltr.-barrel and Canister level
• 60 Ltr.-Capacity for oil

60102-00 Modell Kombi 3


• for 2 x Canister level
• 60 Ltr.-Capacity for oil

60103-00 Additive level 1


• for 1 x 60 Ltr. barrel

60104-00 Additive level 2


• for Canister

60251-09 Ball valve 3/4” type KGL 20


incl. 90° discharge tube for oil drums

60251-10 Drain valve 3/4” type MAV 20 Type KGL 20 Type MAV 20
self-closing for oil drums

60251-03 Jug carrier type KT/1


Galvanised sheet steel
Size approx. 350 x 300 x 20 mm (LxWxH)

To be used on the oil drum rack

6/04
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
OIL AND PETROL SUPPLY 6

Fresh oil supply


with drums
FRESH OIL SUPPLY
WITH DRUMS

Pneumatic oil pump CAUTION


- pneumatic pump max. 10 l/min
- air input pressure max. 8 bar (150 PSI) For all pneum. pumps we
Connections: recommend attaching a
- compressed air supply G 1/4” IG, pressure reducer with
pressure limiter and plug pin manometer.
- oil connection (pressure side): G1/2” AG The incoming compressed
air must be oiled and free
of water! (Maintenance
60200-08 Model OP 90 D 30/1 E unit). After completion of
- as drum pump for max. 200-litre drums the tapping process, the
- ratio 1:3 pump air supply must be
- incl. air suction barrier LAS 1.0 interrupted to avoid
- PTB / BEV approval uncontrolled oil leakage.
- calibratable

60200-02 Model OP 90 D 30/1


- as drum pump for max. 200-litre drums
- ratio 1:3
- 2” screw joint
- non calibratable

Pumps for tanks available on request


60200-00 Suction pipe for compressed air pump
- pipe with backflow preventer (air suction barrier)
- calibratable

60205-11 Suction hose type SG20-1.5


- for pneum. pumps and 200-l drums
- length 1.5 m incl. backflow preventer and filter
- non calibratable

Suction pipes for tanks available on request

60205-06 Pressure reducer


type D/M 06 with ball valve
- for the compressed air supply line to the pneumatic pump

60205-01 3/8" compressed air maintenance unit


- filter, water separator, side oiler

not shown

60205-00 Air separator LAS 2.8/1


- necessary for calibratable pneumatic pumps
- it can be retrofitted also in non-certified systems
- PTB and BEV approval

60207-30 Line breather LEL


- necessary for calibratable system
- inspection window with white reflector,
vent screw and flexible vent pipe made of PA, DN 08
- 3/4“ IG connection thread, structural height about 115 mm
- PN 16, inspection window Ø 18 mm
6/04
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
6
Fresh oil supply
with drums OIL AND PETROL SUPPLY

FRESH OIL SUPPLY


WITH DRUMS
60205-18 Oil connection hose
TYPE ÖVS 02.12
- reinforced on both sides, 1/2", max. 50 bar
- length of 2 m from the pump to the pipe

CAUTION:
60205-68 Safety valve When applying a
pipeline, a safety valve
TYPE ÜSV 20 must be installed on the
- for installation in the pipeline incl. 2 m
pressure side.
return hose, max. 20 bar,
to the drum or tank

60205-60 Ball valve


TYPE KGH 12
- for mounting directly downstream of the pump
and before consumers (taps)

Pipeline to reel
or oil dispensing
system
60260-00 Connection pipeline
Compressed
- from oil connection hose to taps as reels air oil pump
or oil dispensing systems depending on the location
Pressure reducing
valve with ball cock
Oil connection
60261-00 High-pressure
Compressed hose
air
connection hose
- 2 m with electrical connector
High-pressure
- to the pressure-side connection of the oil pump (air)
connection
hose

60205-09 Mudflap
TYPE SF 12
- for installation in the pipeline

60205-17 Oil connection hose


TYPE ÖVS 01.12
- reinforced on both sides, 1/2", max. 50 bar
- 1-m length as a connection of the pipeline,
for example to the reel

60262-00 Elbow union


- for mounting on a reel (not shown)
6/05
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
OIL AND PETROL SUPPLY 6

oil delivery
Pumps,
FRESH OIL SUPPLY

60040-20 Hose reel


Model 4.08.12-G
Closed design
Automatic hose reel made of cast aluminium,
casing made of shock-resistant plastic, outlet window with
metal rollers, incl. 8 m rubber hose DN 12
and stopper, stand made of galvanised sheet steel, axial
swivel joint, G 1/2“ AG IG, pressure max. 50 bar, size:
approx. 360 x 140 x 405 mm (L x W x H)

60090-01 Hose reel


Model 9.12.10/1
Automatic hose reel in a lacquered sheet steel design. Variable outlet
window with PVC rollers. Multiple increments per revolution.
Incl. 12-m rubber hose DN 10. Pressure max. 50 bar /60°C

60212-07 Axial oil swivel joint


• For hose reel

Oil dispensing system -


Oil jug station
For connection to an oil line for filling oil cans.
For unmeasured, measured and calibrated output.

60224-01 Model KAS 1


Delivery valve with anti-drip mouthpiece,
sturdy sheet steel frame, galvanised grid, drip pan,
size: approx. 340 x 520 x 700 mm (LxWxH)
60224-02 Model KAS 2
Same design as model KAS 1, but 2 delivery valves
with anti-drip mouthpiece,
size: approx. 340 x 520 x 700 mm (LxWxH)
60224-03 Model KAS 3
Same design as model KAS 1, but 3 delivery valves
with anti-drip mouthpiece,
size: approx. 340 x 520 x 700 mm (LxWxH)

Manual flow counter,


digital
The volume-measuring system allows accurate and
reliable measurement. The digital liquid crystal display
allows immediate and error-free reading of values.
The measuring unit is designed as an oval wheel meter.
Viscosity range: SAE 5 - SAE 240
LCD 18 E
60210-04 Model LCD 18 E
- calibratable
- calibratable, with a calibration preliminary test certificate
- resettable LCD display, 5-digit / 8 mm
- non-resettable summation unit, G 1/2” IG
60210-03 Model LCD 18/1
- non calibratable
- resettable LCD display, 5-digit / 8 mm
- non-resettable summation unit, G 1/2” IG
LCD 50 E
60210-07 Modell LCD 50 E LCD 18/1
• eichfähig, mit Eichvorprüfschein
• orwahlzähler, 6 x Mengenvorwahlspeicher more flow counters
• Rückstellbare LC -Anzeige 5-stellig / 10 mm on request
• Nicht rückstellbares Summierwerk, G 1/2" I
• orwahl in 0,1 Ltr-Schritten

60212-01 Outlet pipe type AR-M


- angled with anti-drip mouthpiece for motor oil
60212-00 Axial swivel joint
type ÖDG 12
- for fuel nozzle and manual flow counter
6/07 - connection thread G 1/2” IG/AG
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
6
oil supply
OIL AND PETROL SUPPLY

FRESH OIL SUPPLY


Fresh

WITH TANKS
Storage and disposal tanks Mod. T/S
Double-walled tank with PE inner container, outer container: sheet
steel jacket, hot dip galvanised on both sides, 4 x 2" IG openings,
installation without additional catch basin.
Approval No. Z-40.21-118
Outside water protection areas, storage tanks are permitted without catch
basin or retention facility; within water protection areas, the responsible
water authority is also to be consulted.

60270-03 Model T/S 700


- 700-l capacity, without pallet, weight approx. 58 kg
- size approx. 1135 x 720 x 1010 mm (LxWxH)

60270-04 Model T/S 1000


- 1000-l capacity, without pallet, weight approx. 82 kg
- size approx. 1135 x 720 x 1440 mm (LxWxH)

Pallet tanks are also available.

60270-00 Tank vent line


into the open air depending on the location

60271-10 Venting cap


with 2” pipe nipple

60271-08 Tanker coupling


with 2" bend for filling

60271-22 Liquid level indicator


700 l Type FA/S 700

60271-23 Liquid level indicator


1000 l Type FA/S 1000

60271-00 Overfill protection


700 / 1000 l
type ÜBF for fresh oil tanks
Officially approved under WHG § 19 l Fresh
and used oil A III
- Level sensor type 76 A, special length 500 mm,
Æ 16 mm, 3/4” connection
- Level limiter type NB 220 QS with integrated alarm
and receipt arrangement. Alarm via signal light and
alarm buzzer. Acknowledgment of the alarm buzzer
via confirmation key (signal light at the same time).
Other connection options for external signalling devices
are available.
- Rack, protection class IP 40, auxiliary power
AC 230 V ~, 50 Hz

60271-04 Oil leak display type LWG


- for fresh and used oil storage GF A III VbF
- warning device with probe for level monitoring
- with audible and visual signal
- protection class IP 30

60271-03 Limit switch type GW


- protection class IP 40

Electrical and pneumatic pumps as well as accessories available on request!


6/08
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
6
Measuring cups OIL AND PETROL SUPPLY

MEASURING CUPS - JUGS -


funnels
jugs

FUNNELS

60241-05 Tin jug (tinplate)


Jug with measuring scale, 0.5 l - calibratable

60241-06 Tin jug (tinplate)


Jug with measuring scale, 1 l - calibratable

60241-07 Tin jug (tinplate)


Jug with measuring scale, 1 l - calibratable

Plastic jug
for use in workshops,
at home and for hobby activities
- made of oil and acid resistant polypropylene or polyethylene
- with embossed scale
- stable, safe handling
- overflow protection through ergonomically shaped
discharge area
- option: flexible convoluted tubing LD-PE
item as an extensioncept for 5-litre jug)
- non calibratable

60241-00 0.5-l jug - oil-resistant


60241-01 1-l jug - oil-resistant
60241-02 2.0-l jug - oil-resistant
60241-03 3.0-l jug - oil-resistant
60241-04 5.0-l jug - oil-resistant
60241-13 Outlet pipe flexible
for 0.5-to-3.0-litre plastic jugs

60241-46 Outlet pipe


for 5-litre jugs

Tank and
universal funnel
made of polyethylene (HDPE), natural,
for a variety of application areas
with overflow edge, resistant to acids, alkalis, fuels,
oils, etc.; with interchangeable sieve
made of phosphor bronze

60243-00 Tank funnel Ø 253 mm

60243-10 Funnel universal Ø 260 mm

60243-20 Funnel universal Ø 350 mm

60243-40 Convoluted tubing item


for drum funnels
60243-30 Nozzle for drum funnels

60242-00 Funnel set


60/ 80/ 100/ 120 mm
60242-50 Funnel set
6/09
140/ 164/ 208 mm
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
6
oil disposal OIL AND PETROL SUPPLY

USED OIL DISPOSAL


Used

WITH TANKS / DRUMS

Storage and disposal tanks Mod. T/S


Double-walled tank with PE inner container, outer container:
sheet steel jacket, hot dip galvanised on both sides,
Outside water
4 x 2" IG openings, installation without additional catch basin. protection areas,
Approval No. Z-40.21-118 storage tanks are
permitted without catch
60270-03 Model T/S 700 basin or retention
facility; within water
- 700-l capacity, without pallet, weight approx. 58 kg protection areas, the
- size approx. 1135 x 720 x 1010 mm (LxWxH) responsible water
authority is also to be
60270-04 Model T/S 1000 consulted.

- 1000-l capacity, without pallet, weight approx. 82 kg


- size approx. 1135 x 720 x 1440 mm (LxWxH)

60271-45 Liquid level indicator


for 200-litre drums

60271-22 Liquid level indicator


700 l Type FA/S 700

60271-23 Liquid level indicator


1000 l Type FA/S 1000

e
pip
60271-12 Suction pipe for used oils

tion
700 l Type ASR 700

Suc
200 l

60271-13 Suction pipe for used oils


1000 l Type ASR 1000

60270-00 Tank vent line 700 / 1000 l


into the open air depending on the location

60271-10 Venting cap


with 2” pipe nipple

60271-08 Tanker coupling


with 2" bend for tank draining
60271-00 Overfill protection
type ÜBF for fresh oil tanks
Officially approved under WHG § 19 l Fresh
and used oil A III
- Level sensor type 76 A, special length 500 mm,
Æ 16 mm, 3/4” connection
- Level limiter type NB 220 QS with integrated alarm
and receipt arrangement. Alarm via signal light and
alarm buzzer. Acknowledgment of the alarm buzzer
via confirmation key (signal light at the same time).
Other connection options for external signalling devices
are available.
- Rack, protection class IP 40, auxiliary power
AC 230 V ~, 50 Hz

60271-04 Oil leak display type LWG


- for fresh and used oil storage GF A III VbF
- warning device with probe for level monitoring
- with audible and visual signal
- protection class IP 30

60271-60 Combination signal


• Alarm horn, 92dB / 1 m 230 V~, flashing light, orange
• Required if tank can not be seen during filling
6/10
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
OIL AND PETROL SUPPLY 6

oil disposal
USED OIL DISPOSAL

Used
WITH TANKS / DRUMS
Used oil filling hopper
with lid and strainer

60271-11 Filling hopper type EFT


To be placed on a used oil tank.

Large volume and surface area to easily


empty oil pans or drain used oil containers.
Lockable
Outflow nozzle
for tank connection
9000
463 114
2-step folding ladder
• sturdy aluminium stringers
• silver grey steel steps with black anti-slip coating
• wide steps for a high level of comfort
when standing
• stand height 460 mm

9000
463 115
3-step folding ladder
• sturdy aluminium stringers
• silver grey steel steps with black anti-slip coating
• wide steps for a high level of comfort
when standing
• stand height 690 mm

9000
466 208
Filling hopper
for 200-l drums
• large-sized, covering the entire drum conference
• as a result, spillage is prevented
• oil filters, etc., can be drained in a clean, easy way
• glass fibre-reinforced synthetic material (GFK)
• Ø 560 mm H 150 mm

60113-10 Oil Drum Attachment for


emptying of oil filters
• for installation on 20 / 30L standard pails (Ø 28 cm)
• oil drain connects directly to the barrel opening
• with oil filter receiving for simple and
efficient draining of the oil filter
• made of chemical resistant polyethylene
• includes a filter for capturing of debris

60114-00 Catch basin


high quality and stable in shape,
for collecting oils, fuels, coolants
Size: 56 x 43 x 8.5 cm

60115-00 Catch basin


high quality and stable in shape,
for collecting oils, fuels, coolants
Size: 88 x 60 x 10 cm
6/11
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
6
oil disposal OIL AND PETROL SUPPLY
Used

USED OIL DISPOSAL

60113-00 Plastic oil


catch basin
- with outflow and collecting grid
- Capacity: 7.6 l
- size: 540 x 385 x 125 mm

Extra flat

60113-20 Oil Tub


• manufactured from oil and fuel resistant
• made of HDPE plastic
• impact resistant
• diameter: 400 mm
• height: 125 mm
• weight 650 g
• impact resistant

60113-30 Oil Tub


• manufactured from oil fuel resistant HDPE plastic
• content : 3,5 Ltr.
• impact resistant

Outlet pipe
60112-00 Movable used oil container
Model AOG 1003 Z

With compressed air operated emptying system 360°


360°

Particularly suitable for motorcycles,


4 wheels of which 2 swivel castors and steering bar

With pivoting collecting hopper Compressed


Height adjustable from 840 to 1160 mm, air connection
size: approx. 500 x 600 x 840 mm (L x W x H)
Weight: approx. 25 kg

For collecting used oil when working on lift platforms.


Drain by means of discharge cock or compressed air.

Container capacity 70 l

6/12
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
OIL AND PETROL SUPPLY 6

cleaning
Parts
PARTS CLEANING

ECON provides a complete supply and disposal concept.


You can order 50 or 200 litres of the new cleaning liquid.
Upon request, we can collect the used liquid
and provide you with a disposal guarantee.
In many Länder a catch basin must be used starting from a drum amount of > 50 l .

60250-24 Catch basin


With grid, without feet, galvanised
- 210-l basin volume
- max. load capacity 500 kg
- size approx. 800 x 1200 x 225 mm (LxWxH)

60704-02 Cold cleaner agent 50-l drum


- for oil and grease contamination
- incl. disposal of old stock, plus freight cost share

60704-00 Cold cleaner 200-l drum


- for oil and grease contamination
- incl. disposal of old stock, plus freight cost share

100 Freight cost per drum

60700-01 Cleaning tank


Attachment for 200-litre drums
Size 800 x 550 x 300 (LxWxH)
The cleaning tank is screwed directly onto the drum.
Self-priming electric
drum pump type KRP 630 E; suitable
drum size 200 l,
drum size determining working height.

60700-23 Cleaning Tank


Cleaning trough on a stable base with cross braces.
The perforated plate made of galvanized steel is
inserted into a trough with conical drain. The back and
side walls are galvanized with edge protectors.

For 50 - 60 liter barrels - Delivery without barrel.

• Self - priming electric drum pump type


KRP 400 E
• Leveling feet to balance uneven surface
• Measurement 590 x 490 x 1300 mm (L x W x H
• Load capacity 30 kg
• Weight ca. 35 k
• Work height ca. 1040 m

6/13
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
6
cleaning
parts
OIL AND PETROL SUPPLY

PARTS CLEANING

60869-30 Parts Washer


• for cleaning of small parts
• cleaner brush is rinsed for best cleaning results
• suitable for watersoluble solvents
• capacity: min. 15 liter
• W640 x D440 x H260 mm

60701-54 Part-Washing machine


For small workpieces. For automatic cleaning with hot
water and biodegradable detergent. Robust stainless
steel execution in a compact design.

• stainless steel version


• Tank capacity 40 Ltr.
• Heated 0-70 ° C, very high washing performance
• Rotating washing basket, Ø 360 mm
• Sustainability 70 kg
• Time switch 0-60 mi
• Water level control
• Current voltage 230 V, 2.55 kW
• Usable Height ca. 340 mm

60704-11 Cleansing extract


• Biodegradable cleaning concentrate for
washing machines, 20 ltr. Canisters
• Concentration mixture 1:20 (5%),
full cleaning power from 40 ° C

60703-00 Electric pump


For use as a feed pump, e.g. cold cleaner
type KRP 630 E, 230 V, 50 Hz, 18 W,
Suction pipe 630 mm, conveying capacity 3 - 5 l / min,
including connection cable with schuko plug, foot switch
and discharge hose, thermal protection

60703-01 Electric pump


Type KRP 630 EOS
Identical to Art. 60703-00, but without foot switch

60705-00 Cleaning brush (Fine)


Hollow shaft brush for the connection to a
cleaning hose (cold cleaner) Ø 30 mm,
Hose connection 10 mm outside

60705-02 Cleaning brush (Fine)


Same design as 60705-00 but with Ø 35 mm

60705-46 Cleaning brush (rough)


Hollow shaft for the connection to a cleaning hose
(cold cleaner) Ø 35 mm,
Hose connection 10 mm outside

60705-06 Spare hose


Rubber hose, DN 10, 160 cm

Parts cleaning on a "biological basis" is available on request


6/14
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
OIL AND PETROL SUPPLY 6

cleaning
parts
PARTS CLEANING

Ultrasonic cleaning is the most modern and efficient cleaning method, primarily for
very-hard-to-reach spots. Ultrasonic cleaning removes
oil and dirt residues (even metallic ones) or traces of corrosion on injection nozzles,
carburettors and engine parts in just a few minutes.
Ultrasonic cleaning is widely applicable and works 100% with proper treatment
of the cleaner.
An ultrasonic cleaner cannot be missing in any automotive workshop.
As the application field is large, do not choose too small a device!

60150-00 Ultrasonic cleaner


ECON SONIC - ES 100 H
Stainless steel vibratory trough
240 x 140 x 100 mm (LxWxD), 3-litre content.
HF continuous peak power 2 x 160 W/Per.
Frequency 35 kHz. Timer 1 – 15 min and
continuous operation. Heating 30 - 80°C,
140 W. drip-proof stainless steel housing.
Carrying handles.

indispensable in the workshop Delivered complete with all parts

60151-00 Ultrasonic cleaner


ECON SONIC - RK 156 BH
Stainless steel vibratory trough

500 x 140 x 150 mm (L x W x D), 9-litre content.


4 PZT broad beam oscillation systems.
HF continuous peak power 2 x 450 W/Per..
Frequency 35 kHz. Timer 1 – 15 min and
continuous operation. Heating 30 - 80 °C, 600 W.
drip-proof stainless steel housing.
1/4" drain ball valve.

for 4 carburettors

Delivered complete
with all parts

60149-00 Ultrasonic cleaner


ECON SONIC - RK 510 H
Stainless steel vibratory trough

300 x 240 x 150 mm (L x W x D), 9-litre content.


4 PZT broad beam oscillation systems,
HF continuous peak power 2 x 320 W/Per..
Frequency 35 kHz. Timer 1 – 15 min and
continuous operation. Heating 30 - 80 °C, 400 W.
drip-proof stainless steel housing.
1/2" drain ball valve. Carrying handles.

Komplett geliefert

6/15
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
6
cleaning OIL AND PETROL SUPPLY
Parts

PARTS CLEANING

60152-00 Ultrasonic cleaner


ECON SONIC - RK 1028 H
For larger parts
500 x 300 x 200 mm (L x W x D)
Content: 28.0 litres, working filling quantity 19 l
Heating 30 - 80°C, thermostatically adjustable
Stainless steel vibratory trough, drain: ball valve 1/2";
stainless steel, drip-proof housing,
side grips,
timer: 1 – 15 min and continuous operation
Techn. data:
Oscillation system:
8 PZT broad beam oscillation systems,
HF generator: overload protected, power-constant,
Operating mode: double half-wave, operating frequency:
automatic frequency feature, HF continuous peak power:
2 x 600 W/Per., power connection: 230 V / 50/60 Hz. Delivered complete
with all parts

60150-02 Nozzle sieve


For inserting smaller parts which
may fall through the stainless steel basket.

Use in all ECON SONIC


ultrasonic cleaners.

Standard cleaner
TICKOPUR R33
Universal cleaner for carburettors, injection nozzles,
injection system parts, tools, machine parts.
It removes general soiling.
60157-00 5 Litres

60158-00 25 Litres

Special cleaner
TICKOPUR Tr3
Acid special cleaner - with stronger cleaning power.
For fuel residues, carburettors and
injection nozzles, tools, machine parts.
It removes mineral residues.
60158-20 5 Litres

60158-30 25 Litres

60159-00 ECON Carb-Cleaner


for carburettors, etc., for use without
ultrasonic cleaner, 1 l Shell product, specially
developed concentrate for quickly cleaning
residues and contaminants in the
carburettor.

For use directly in the carburettor or


as a bath for the parts to be cleaned.

Mixing proportion 1 : 4 with petrol.

Other cleaners on request!


6/16
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
OIL AND PETROL SUPPLY 6

Oil Binders
OIL BINDERS

Chemical agent and


oil binder
Elephant Sorb Universal Type III R, granular, pourable
and spreadable natural product from volcanic rock
for binding oils, emulsions, paints, alkaline
solutions and acids, even on oily substrates,
particularly nonslip, chemically neutral, non-toxic

1kg binds up to 1.14 l oil


with DEKRA test certificates for
chemical binders
9000
467 911 20-litre container
• Container: Bag, content: 20 l
• Grain size: 0.3 - 1.5 mm
• Bulk weight: 310 g/l

9000
467 910 40-litre container
• Container: Bag, content: 40 l
• Grain size: 0.3 – 1.5 mm
• Bulk weight: 310 g/l

9000 Oil binding fleece


467 905 • it absorbs oils, fuels and other non-aqueous
fluids
• it can be used on oily water surfaces too
• P.U. = box with 100 wipes
• size 400 x 500 mm, centrally perforated
• it binds up to max. 97 l/P.U.
• Colour: white

Universal absorber-
concentrate
• highly concentrated binder granulate for oil and
chemicals, TÜV approved
• also ideal for paints, varnishes, resins and
other pasty leaks
• 1 kg absorbs up to 8.4 kg of oil
• light in weight
• a 100% fluid intake is ensured by actively
absorbing cell structures

9000
467 923 10-litre container
• with handhold, reclosable

9000
467 921 50-litre container
• with handhold

9000
467 922 100-litre container
• with grip lug
6/17
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
6
Petrol supply
OIL AND PETROL SUPPLY

PETROL SUPPLY

60167-00 Fuel suction and


transfer pump
- to empty the tank after a mistake committed when
filling (petrol instead of diesel) or to remove a
submerged fuel pump during body work,adjust or
read the fuel supply unit, clean the container...
- mobile 40-l container (on wheels) (tank as well
as petrol AND diesel lines can be completely
emptied)
- clean intake and discharge thanks to a pneumatic
gearbox
- Delivery inclusive of anti-static earth cable,
anti-overflow hose and 3 fuel probes
- Emptying via injection lines, the tank filler neck
or fuel lines

60164-10 Fuel Syringe


• Transparent design to visualise the fluid
• Suitable to add or remove gasoline or
diesel fuel from filters, etc
• Rotative switch off
• CAPACITY : 1,5L capacity

60163-00 Fluid Transfer Pump

Quick and easy method to transfer or syphon all types


of fluids including fuel, oil, transmission fluid, water,
etc.

60166-00 Hand pump


Suction lifter with PVC hose and
stopcock
For transferring and draining different fluids;
petrol, acid and chemicals resistant

6/18
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
OIL AND PETROL SUPPLY 6

Reserve jerry cans


Measuring cups -
Measuring cups -
Reserve jerry cans
Measuring Cups
from acid and chemicals resistant
polypropylene (PP)
for use in laboratory,
workshop and household
- professional quality, closed handle for safe
handling
- with injected and blue embossed scale

60241-08 0.5-litre measuring cup

60241-09 1-litre measuring cup

60241-10 2-litre measuring cup

60241-11 3-litre measuring cup

60241-12 5-litre measuring cup

60241-20 3-piece Measuring Cup Set


• includes the following 3 measuring cups:
• 500 ml measuring cup with 50 ml graduation line
• 1000 ml measuring cup with 50 ml graduation line
• 2000 ml beaker containing 100 ml graduation line

60170-05 5-litre reserve


jerry can black
officially approved by BAM (Bundesanstalt
für Materialforschung und -prüfung,
Federal Institute for Materials Research
and Testing) according to RKK guidelines,
TÜV approved, suitable for Otto and
diesel fuel with captive fastener
closure and flexible outlet pipe
60170-10 Reserve jerry cans,
10-litre, black
otherwise same design as
Art. 60170-05

60170-20 Reserve jerry can,


20-litre, black
otherwise same design as
Art. 60170-05
6/19
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
6
Grease Guns
OIL AND PETROL SUPPLY

GREASE GUNS

60245-00 Single handed grease gun


• with a pressure of up to 10,000 PSI, with bleed screw
• suitable for filling with cartridges (400 / 220 mm)
and loose grease, equipped with nozzle tube and
hydraulic nosepiece

4000 Hand lever grease gun


356 302 • for 400-g cartridge, design according to DIN 1284
• grease filling device or loose grease
• separate filling and bleed valve according to DIN 1283
• processing of grease up to NLGI/2 possible
• incl. high-pressure reinforced hose 11 x 300 mm and
4-jaw grip nosepiece
• Connection: M10x1

4000 Impact press - Pressol


356 301
• 150-ml content
• complete with hollow universal and pointed
nosepiece
• suitable for grease (up to NLGI/2) and oil

6/20
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY 7

Pipeline
PIPELINE

ECON plans and advice.


A well-planned pipe layout is the basis for a good compressed air supply.
A ring line is in any case advisable because the pipe cross sections can become smaller.
Pipelines can be used in a cable duct or
installed in an empty pipe (reel material).
Rigid pipelines are mounted, inter alia, on the wall
as they must be laid in a visually clean condition.
For each point of delivery (end distribution boxes) there is a stub.
For most two-wheeler and quad workshops, a 15 mm line is sufficient, which reduces costs.
A sound maintenance unit should be attached to the compressor with dehumidifier
and oiler. Connection to the compressor via a pressure-resistant hose.

Recommendation:
Ring line

End distribution box


with 1 x 1/2" plug connection

Stub

End distribution box with 1


x 1/2" plug connection

Maintenance unit

Pressure-resistant
hose

Compressor Drainage 7/01


The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
7
Compressors
COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY

COMPRESSORS

Planning and consulting by ECON Workshop Equipment is


free of charge. Just ask us.
A tidy workshop needs a sound, functioning compressed air supply.
The "core" of air supply is the compressor, in an appropriate industrial quality.
Two factors are decisive for the selection:
A - Container volume / B - Transmission power of the compressor
Another element which needs consideration is the consumption of compressed air by blow guns,
pneumatic drivers, tyre inflators and other air consumers. Pay attention to the simultaneity factor!

ECON compressors are solid, durable


Industrial reciprocating compressors in workshop quality.
70300-10 Compressor
Type EC370
• Mobile piston compressor in oil lubricated design
• Highly processed 1-stage compressor block with
2 cylinders
• Including pressure reducer for accurate discharge pressure adjustment
• Air-filled rubber light-weight wheels
• The condensate drain is made by means of a drain screw
• 2 front feet for secure standing
• Pressure relief via Condor pressure switch

Boiler size L: 50
Boiler pressure bar: 10
Suction capacity L / min .: 380
Delivery volume L / min .: 240
Speed rpm: Sound 1.300
pressure level dB (A): 74
Motor KW / PS: 2,2/3
Volt / Hz: 230/50
Dimensions mm: 1100 x 360 x 730
Weight kg: 52

70308-00 Compressor
Type EC500-50 Pro CM3
• Very quiet and suitable for the toughest
conditions of use in the trade
• Portable piston compressor in oil lubricated
70309-00 industrial design
• V-belt operated 2-cylinder Longlife unit with
very high efficiency
• Including pressure reducer for accurate discharge
pressure adjustment
• Pressure relief via Condor pressure switch
• With large profiled, ball-bearing hard-rubber wheels
• Condensate drainage is effected by means of a ball valve

Boiler size L: 50
Boiler pressure bar: 10
Suction capacity L / min .: 550
Delivery volume L / min .: 330
Speed rpm: Sound 1.200
pressure level dB (A): 97/78
Motor KW / PS: 2,2/3
Volt / Hz: 230/50
Dimensions mm: 860 x 380 x 710
Weight kg: 56 Also available in 400V version!
7/02
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY 7

Compressor
COMPRESSOR

70302-10 Compressor Type EC480


• Movable reciprocating compressor in an oil-lubricated design
• Slow-running, wedge-belt driven 2-cylinder
1 stage series unit
• TÜV certification not required due to 90-litre boiler
• Pressure relief via mechanical venting valve
• With large, solid rubber wheels and castors
for easy handling
• The condensate drain valve
• Supplied with phase inverter
Boiler size L: 90
Boiler pressure bar: 10
Suction capacity L / min .: 480
Delivery volume L / min .: 346
Speed rpm: Sound 1.400
pressure level dB (A): Motor 78
KW / PS: 3/4
Volt / Hz: 400/50
Dimensions mm: 1070 x 430 x 920
Weight kg: 74

70312-00 Compressor Type EC890-90


• Mobile industrial piston compressor in oil-lubricated 2-stage design
• V-belt driven 2-cylinder unit
• Pressure relief via Condor pressure switch
• With large hard rubber wheels for easy transport
• The condensate drain is made by means of a ball valve
• Supplied with phase inverter
• 2 steering wheels on the front for a perfect handling

90
Boiler size L:
Boiler pressure bar: 10
Suction capacity L / min .: 890
Delivery volume L / min .: 690
Speed rpm: Sound 1.000
pressure level dB (A): 97/78
Motor KW / PS: 5,5/7,5
Volt / Hz: 400/50
Dimensions mm: 1130 x 500 x 1020
Weight kg: 115

70303-00 Compressor Type Super Silent 90


• Movable reciprocating compressor in an oil-lubricated design
• V-belt-driven, 2-cylinder,1-stage in-line unit
• TÜV certification not required due to 90-litre boiler
• Start unloader via Condor pressure switch control
• With large, profiled, hard rubber wheels
• Condensate drainage occurs via a ball valve
• With sound insulation box for ultra-silent operation

Boiler size L: 90
Boiler pressure bar: 10
Suction capacity L/min.: 460
Delivery quantity l/min.: 305
Rotational speed rev/min.: 1100
Sound pressure level LWA/dB: 82 /66
Engine KW/PS: 2,2/3
Volt/Hz: 230/50
Dimensions mm: 1200 x 450 x 960
Weight kg: 85
7/03
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
7 COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY
Compressors

COMPRESSORS

70313-00 Compressor Type EC780-10-90


• Mobile industrial piston compressor in 2-stage design
• V-belt-operated 2-cylinder unit
• Pressure relief via Condor pressure switch
• With large hard rubber wheels for easy transport
• The condensate drain is made by means of a ball valve
• Supplied with phase inverter
• 2 steering wheels on the front for a perfect handling

Boiler size L: 90
Boiler pressure bar: 10
Suction capacity L / min .: 780
Supply quantity L / min .: 520
Speed rpm: Sound pressure 1.200
level LWA / dB: Motor KW / 97/78
PS: 4/5,5
Volt / Hz: 400/50
Dimensions mm: 1070 x 390 x 800
Weight kg: 85

70314-00 Compressor Type EC650-90/15 bar


• Mobile piston compressor in oil-lubricated 2-stage design
• V-belt driven 2-cylinder unit
• In 15 bar version
• Pressure relief via Condor pressure switch
• With large hard rubber wheels for easy transport
• The condensate drain is made by means of a ball valve
• Supplied with phase inverter
• 2 steering wheels on the front for a perfect handling

Boiler size L: 90
Boiler pressure bar: 15
Suction capacity L / min .: 420
Supply quantity L / min .: 310
Speed rpm: 900
Sound pressure level LWA /dB: 85/68
Motor KW / PS: 3/4
Volt / Hz: 400/50
Dimensions mm: 935 x 400 x 1000
Weight kg: 75

70315-00 Compressor Type EC600-50


• Gasoline operated compressor for mobile use
• V-belt-operated 2-cylinder unit in 1-stage design
• With robust HONDA GX 160 - 4 stroke engine
• With pressure regulator for accurate delivery pressure adjustment
• With large hard rubber wheels for easy transport
• The condensate drain is made by means of a ball valve

Boiler size L: 50
Boiler pressure bar: 10
Suction capacity L / min .: 410
Supply quantity L / min .: 300
Speed rpm: Sound pressure 1000
level LWA / dB: 97/78
Motor KW / PS: 4
Dimensions mm: 410 x 1000 x 870
Weight kg: With cable pull starter and automatic no-load
73
change-over at max. pressure
7/04
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY 7

Compressor
STATIONARY COMPRESSORS

70304-50 Compressor
Type EC59-270 FT
• Compressor system with horizontal air tank
• Oil-lubricated 2 stage units in various performance classes
• Supplied with vibration damper set for vibration-free operation
• All units are equipped with a Condor pressure switch
• The condensate drain is made by means of a ball valve

Boiler size L: 270


Boiler pressure bar: 10
Suction capacity L / min .: 653
Supply quantity L / min .: 530
Speed rpm: 1200
Sound pressure level LWA /dB: 98/79
Motor KW / PS: 4/5,5
Volt / Hz: 400/50
Dimensions mm: 1570 x 590 x 1150
Weight kg: 180

70305-10 Compressor
Type ECN59-270 Pro
• Compressor system with space-saving compressed air tank
in standing design
• Oil-lubricated 2 stage units in various performance classes
• Low-speed 2-cylinder series units with high efficiency
• Supplied with vibration damper set for vibration-free operation
• The condensate drain is made by means of a ball valve

Boiler size L: 270 stehend


Boiler pressure bar: 10
Suction capacity L / min .: 690
Supply quantity L / min .: 520
Speed rpm: 1200
Sound pressure level LWA /dB: 97/78
Motor KW / PS: 4/5,5
Volt / Hz: 400/50
Dimensions mm: 800 x 595 x 1800
Weight kg: 140

70306-10 Compressor
Type EC480-10
• Piston compressor in oil lubricated version
• Standing, space-saving boiler
• V-belt-operated 2-cylinder unit
• Including pressure reducer for accurate discharge pressure adjustment
• Startup relief via Condor MDR 3 pressure switch
• Condensate drain screw
Boiler size L: 200 stehend
Boiler pressure bar: 10
Suction capacity L / min .: 480
Supply quantity L / min .: 377
Speed rpm: 1400
Sound pressure level LWA /dB: 78
Motor KW / PS: 3/4
Volt / Hz: 400/50
Dimensions mm: 720 x 570 x 1760
Weight kg: 120
7/05
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
7
Refrigeration dryer
and optional
COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY
component parts

Refrigeration dryer and


optional component parts

70330-00 Connection hose


• from the compressor to the wall distributor
• Length 1 mtr.
• Two-way connection 1/2 "

Air conditioning
• The right solution for your compressor
• The efficient design is the basis for cost-effective
and safe operation
• Each dryer has a stainless steel demister for safe separation
as well as a fully automatic condensation drain
• Perfect removal of the condensate from the compressed air

70331-00 Typ EC-RAS 600


Volume flow L/min: 600
Volt/Hz: 230/50 Other refrigeration versions on
Measurement mm: 305 x 360 x 409 request.
Weight kg: 18

70331-10 Connecting hose for cold dryer


70331-20 Bypass line for refrigerators

70332-00 Automatic drainage


• For mounting on a compressor from 50 liters boiler
• With niveauregulated water drain
• Supplied with mounting kit to connect drainage
to compressors from 50 L boiler to 2000 L boiler

70333-00 Oil water separator


ECWT2500
• The WT series reliably separates the collected
compressed air condensates into water and residual
oil to ensure environmentally-friendly disposal
• The WT series equipped with a sensor system offers
an optimal maintenance overview
• Via an LED display, current wear rates of filter
and activated carbon elements can be read off

Further accessories for compressed air preparation


7/06 on request!
Die Abbildungen können Sonderausstattungen zeigen die nicht zum Lieferumfang gehören.
Abbildungen, Beschreibungen, Farben und Maße sind unverbindlich und dienen nur der Veranschaulichung. Änderungen behalten wir uns vor.
COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY 7

Pipelines and
accessories
PIPELINES AND ACCESSORIES

The "Magic cube", which allows you to do everything.


Throughpass socket, horizontal + vertical, or
end distribution box. At least 2 connections are always
also available to expand the pipeline.

70041-00 End distribution box (Throughpass)


with plug connection
Throughpass 15 mm
Vertical or horizontal use.

70047-00 End distribution box


1 plug connection
Input 15 mm

3 1/2” plugs for further connections.

70044-00 End distribution box


with 2 plug connections
and Y-distributor
Input 15 mm

70015-00 Wall bushing


as end outlet
Brass, air inlet
15 mm with plug connection

70310-00 1/2" filter pressure regulator


incl. manometer 0-12 bar
Delivered without quick couplings

70311-00 1/2" oiler


also suitable for combination with 1/2" filter
pressure regulator

7/07
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
7
Pipelines and
COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY
accessories

PIPELINES AND ACCESSORIES

70031-00 Pipeline
made of soft polyamide
- Pressure range up to 15 bar
- Reel, minimum purchasing quantity 10 m (P.U.)
- Diameter 15 mm

70034-00 Pipeline
made of hard polyamide
- Pressure range up to 15 bar
- Bar items, minimum delivery length 3 m
- Diameter 15 mm

70034-50 Copper pipeline


- Bar items, minimum delivery length 2.5 m
- Diameter 15 mm

70027-00 Pipe terminal


for 15-mm pipe

70022-00 Locking ring Locking ring


for connectors, bends, T-pieces, etc.,
15 mm
1
70017-00 Protective cap
for 15-mm locking rings
3
70112-00 Screw-in connector 1
1/2” x 15 mm with O-ring seal

70115-00 Angle connector 2


15 mm with O-ring seal
2
70149-00 Angle connector 3
15 mm for insertion (inside / outside)
with O-ring seal Safety cap 4

70118-00 Connector 4
for pipeline 15 mm
with O-ring seal

5
70130-00 T connector 5
15 mm with O-ring seal

70133-10 End cap 6 6


15 mm for pipeline
with O-ring seal

7
70011-00 End plug 7
15 mm for electrical connector
7/06
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY 7

Compressed
Air Hose
COMPRESSED AIR HOSE

70180-00 Spiral hose


complete with quick coupling and plug-in grommet,
rotatably mounted
Working length: 2.5 m
Operating pressure:10
Inner Ø: 6
Length (stretched): 5 m
Material: Polyurethane

70181-00 Spiral hose


complete with quick coupling and plug-in grommet,
rotatably mounted
Working length: 4m
Operating pressure:10
Inner-Ø: 6
Length (stretched): 7,5 m
Material: Polyurethane

70182-00 Spiral hose


complete with quick coupling and plug-in grommet,
rotatably mounted
Working length: 6m
Operating pressure:15
Inner-Ø: 8
Length (stretched): 10 m
Material: Polyurethan

70180-27 Compressed air hose with


textile reinforcement
Length 5 m, operating pressure 15 bar,
inner Ø 6 mm x outer Ø 10 mm
with quick coupling and plug-in grommet

70180-28 Compressed air hose with


textile reinforcement
Length 10 m, operating pressure 15 bar,
inner Ø 6 mm x outer Ø 10 mm
with quick coupling and plug-in grommet

70180-26 Compressed air hose with


textile reinforcement (transparent)
Length 50 m, operating pressure 20 bar,
inner Ø 10 x outer Ø 16 mm
without couplings

70180-35 Wall bracket


for compressed air hoses or electric cables,
plastic version suitable for mounting on
the wall or toll trolley

7/07
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
7
Accessories
COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY

ACCESSORIES

70200-10 Blow gun ProSE1


• 360° rotatable SK connection
• max. operating pressure: 8 bar
• accurate dosing
• rubberised handhold
• 100-mm long extension

70200-20 Blow gun ProSE2


• 360° rotatable SK connection
• max. operating pressure: 8 bar
• accurate dosing
• rubberised handhold
• 200-mm long extension

70200-30 Blow gun ProSE3


• 360° rotatable SK connection
• max. operating pressure: 8 bar
• accurate dosing
• rubberised handhold
• 300-mm long extension

70201-00 Blow gun


• Material: Aluminiu
• Connection: Standard SK Nippe
• max. operating pressure: 10 ba
• Good dosage

70202-00 Blow gun


• with 110 mm extension
• unscrewed and rotatable
• max. operating pressure: 10 ba

70203-00 Blow kit


• 5 meter spiral hose with steel couplings
made of PU material
• Winding diameter approx. 40 mm
thus very flexible
• Plastic pistol with 100 mm cranked extension

7/10
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY 7

Accessories
ACCESSORIES

70107-10 10-m compressed air reel


• PVC braided hose with hose stop.
• 1-m connection hose + 10-m rollable hose.
• Automatic hose routing
• Incl. swivelling wall holder.
• Blue housing with yellow hose.
• Max. pressure 15 bar / 180 psi.
• NW 7.2 connection
• With quick lock coupling.
• With hose stop
• Hose 10-mm inner diameter

70003-00 15 m compressed air reel


• PU Schlauc
• Anschlus -Schlauch 1 m
• inkl. schwenkbarer andhalterung
• Max. Druck 12 ba
• Anschluss 1/4
• Mit Schlauchstop
• Schlauch 8 mm Innendurchmesse

70002-00 15 m cable retractors


• Durch die fixierte Arretierung auf dem abel,
kann die Schutzkontaktkupplung beim Aufrollen
nicht in das Gehäuse gezogen werden.
• ein mühsames Aufwickeln der Leitung mehr notwendig.
• omfortabel schwenkbare Wandbefestigung und
Möglichkeit zur Abnahme des Aufrollers für den
mobilen Einsatz.
• Mit klappbarem ragegriff.
• Extrem robuste Ausführung mit 15 m eitung.
• Schutzkontaktstecker und Schutzkontaktkupplun .
• Mit »easy to go«- andbefestigung.
• 15 mtr. Elektrokabel 230 V, 3x 1,5 mm²,
bis 3500 Watt belastbar
• 1,5 mtr. Anschlußkabel mit Stecker
• aufgerollt: 1000 Watt
• abgerollt: 3500 Watt

70004-00 20 m cable retractors


• abeltyp: PVC, Gummi
• Ø mm²: 3Gx1.5mm
• Aufnahme: 20
• Ausgabe: 1
• Spannung/ requenz: AC250V/50Hz
• rüfzeichen: CE
• inkl. schwenkbarer andhalterung

7/11
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
7 COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY
Accessories

ACCESSORIES

Slopes-distributors
Electricity and compressed air directly above the workplace.
• Distributor depending on desired working height
• Housing made of special plastic with handle / tool hook
• Power supply for open sockets: 3 m H05VV-F 3G1,5 black, with protective contact plug
• Power supply for sockets with cover: 3 m H07RN-F 3G1,5 black, with protective contact plug
• Socket for CEE distribution sockets: 3 m H07RN-F5G1,5, black, with CEE connector 400 V / 16 A
• Compressed air hose 3 m, size 9 × 3 mm
• Pneumatic fittings in brass bright
• Including 3 m of stable, galvanized steel link chain
• Distributor with compressed air connection with comfort quick release coupling NW 7,2 and plug nipple
• Compressed air line loadable up to 12 bar, 180 psi

70350-00 Typ HV1


• 2 x 4 shockproof socket, open
• 16 A, 230 V, IP 20

70351-00 Typ HV2


• 4 shockproof socket, open
• 16 A, 230 V, IP 20
• 1 Compressed air supply

70352-00 Typ HV3


• 2 x 4 shockproof socket, with cover
• 16 A, 230 V, IP 44

70353-00 Typ HV4


• 4 shockproof socket, with cover
• 16 A, 230 V, IP 44
• 1 Compressed air supply

70354-00 Typ HV5


• Side 1: 2 CEE-socket 16 A, 400 V
• Side 2: 3 shockproof socket, mit Deckel
16 A, 230 V, IP 44

70355-00 Typ HV6


• Side 1: 2 CEE-socket 16 A, 400 V
• Side 2: 3 shockproof socket, with cover
16 A, 230 V, IP 44
• 1 Compressed air supply

7/12
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
7
Tyre inflator
COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY

TYRE INFLATOR

70168-00 Uncalibrated tyre inflator


Uncalibrated tyre inflator with 30-cm hose
Material: aluminium
Connection: standard SK nipple
30 cm rubber hose with car adapter
Pressure: max. 10 bar
easy-to-read manometer, with manometer
protection, with overpressure protection

70168-01 Calibrated tyre inflator


Calibrated tyre inflator with 30-cm hose
Material: aluminium
Connection: standard SK nipple
30 cm rubber hose with car adapter
Pressure: max. 12 bar
easy-to-read manometer, with manometer protection,
with overpressure protection
incl. 3 adapter set

70170-00 Calibrated tyre inflator


With lever 1

70170-50 Calibrated tyre inflator 2


With torque plug 2
1

70169-00 Calibrated tyre inflator 3


With petrol station plug 3

70172-00 Uncalibrated tyre inflator


- Rotating connection head, valve in eachr
Position can be filled
- Impact resistant, robust plastic housing
- Precision manometer up to 10 bar
- Readability of the manometer at each Metal push button for
valve adjustment guaranteed draining air
Motorcycle, bicycle, quad and car
Lever pressed = Filling
Rest position = Check
Quick coupling
7/13
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY 7

Compressed
air tools
COMPRESSED AIR TOOLS

70164-00 Impact driver set


1/2"- Drive
• Plastic carrying case
• Socket sizes 10, 11, 13, 14, 17, 19, 22, 24, 27
• 100-mm extension
• Torque adjustment on the handle
• Right/left switchover by means of a switching pin

70450-00 Impact screwdriver


CSX 600
Handy and small impact screwdriver Ideal
for daily use in the craft and industrial sectors.
Through a balanced centre of gravity,
an ideal helper for effortless work.
The torque right- and left-hand motion
can be optimally adjusted via a smooth-running
changeover switch.

Technical data:
Air consumption (l / min.): 110
Max. pressure (bar): 6,3
Torque Nm: 600
Weight KG: 1,5

70450-50 Impact screwdriver


CSX 650
• Extremely small propeller with a head length of 97 mm

•Perfectly balanced center of gravity, which allows fatigue-free working

• For daily use


• 850 Nm Breakaway torque

Technical data:
Air consumption (L / min.): 120
Pressure max. (Bar): 6,3
Torque Nm: 650
Weight KG: 1,6

70451-50 Ratchet screwdriver


1/2" CSP90
• 1/2 "square Ant recording
• Right-left shifting is easy on the gearbox head

• Speed is infinitely adjustable


• Adjustable exhaust air deflection
• Supplied with SK connection nipple
• Rubberized handle
• Ideally suited for hard-to-reach, narrow areas
Air consumption L / min .: 170
intake inch: 1/2
pressure bar max .: 6,3
torque Nm: 90
weight kg: 1,3

Other compressed air tools on request! 7/14


The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY 7

Compressed
air tools
COMPRESSED AIR TOOLS

70452-00 Ratchet screwdriver


1/4" ST
• 1/4“ ratchet screwdriver with hardened gearhead
• Right/left switchover occurs smoothly on the
gearhead
• Ideal for hard-to-reach, narrow spaces

Air consumption l/min.: 70


Seating, inch: 1/4
Max. pressure, bar: 6,3
Torque Nm: 27
Weight kg: 0,6

70453-00 Pneumatic drill


• Pneumatic drill with quick chuck up to
10 mm drilling diameter for wood and
metal processing
• 1/4“ IG compressed air connection thread
• Delivery includes SK plug nipple
• With right/left switchover

Air consumption l/min.: 130


Max. pressure, bar: 6,3
Rpm: 1400
Weight kg: 2,4

70454-00 Rod grinder


• Rod grinder set in a case
• Incl. 10 silicon carbide grinding pencils in
different sizes and grain sizes
• The scope of delivery includes a 3- and 6-mm
collet and a mounting wrench

70454-10 Eccentric grinder mini CSP 50A


• Extremely small and super handy
• Lightweight composite housing
• Speed is infinitely adjustable
• With safety lock
• Exhaust air deflection by 360 °
• 50 mm velcro
• Supplied with SK connector nipple
Air consumption L / min: 113
Pressure bar max .: 6,3
U-min: 16000
Weight kg: Eccentric 0,66
stroke mm: 3

7/15
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
7
Compressed
COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY
air tools

COMPRESSED AIR TOOLS

70165-50 16-piece Air Impact


Wrench Set 1/2"
• heavy duty impact quality for workshop use
• 3 protective impact sockets in 17, 19 and 21 mm
• 125 mm extension bar
• 60 mm universal joint
• sockets: 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 21
and 22 mm
• impact wrench data:
forward torque (step 1): 580 - 650 Nm
forward torque (step 2): 745 - 810 Nm
forward torque (step 3): 950 - 1017 Nm
max. torque after 15 seconds: 1355 Nm
• working pressure: 90 psi

70455-00 3 socket set - 1/2"


• Socket set especially reinforced for impact and
ratchet screwdrivers
• 1/2“ square holding fixture
• Especially suitable for wheel change as it is
provided with a plastic sleeve to protect the wheel
against damage
• Sizes 17/19/21 mm / Length 70 mm
• Delivered in a plastic case

70456-00 1/2" socket driver set


• in a tin case for impact and ratchet screwdrivers
• Sizes 9/10/11/13/14/17/19/22/24/27 mm
• CR-V material

70457-00 3/4" socket driver set


• especially reinforced for impact and ratchet
screwdrivers
• 3/4“ square holding fixture
• Material: CR-M
• Thanks to a special steel alloy, this
socket driver set is specifically suitable for tough use
• Sizes 26/27/29/30/32/33/35/36
• Delivered in a plastic case

Further sockets for impact screwdrivers


on request!
7/16
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY 7

Compressed
COMPRESSED AIR TOOLS

air tools
SANDBLASTING

Sandblast cabins for clean blasting work without contamination of the work environment
• Suitable for various blasting items such as quartz, glass balls, plastic balls etc.
• Ideal for cleaning, rust removal or paint removal from metal parts of all kinds, e.g. engine parts, housings, rims, hinges
• High-quality, latex work gloves are firmly attached to the housing
• Lid provided with inspection glass and glued protective film for optimum visibility and protection during workpiece machining
• Lid and door frames fitted with all-round seals for dust-free processing
• With stable table grid for placing workpieces in the cabin interior
• With drainage opening for changing the blasting material
• Suction pipe for blasting material attached to the bottom of the collecting container
• With compressed air connection to the outer side
• Equipped with rubber feet to prevent slipping and for safe standing

70480-00 Sandblast box ECSSK1


• Easily closable lid via turn-lock fasteners
• Cabin exhaust air opening provided with dirt filter
• High-quality blasting gun with ceramic
nozzle 4 ceramic nozzles (4 / 5 /6 / 7 mm)
• 12-volt fluorescent tube with 230-volt power supply
and external switch
• Incl. 5 spare films for the inspection window
• Two large, integrated work gloves made of latex

Technical data: ECSSK1


Working cabin volume: 90 l
Air consumption: 200 - 350 l/min
Working pressure: 2,8 - 8,0 bar
Max. working pressure: 8,6 bar
Compressed air connection: 3/8"
Blasting abrasive grain size: 40 - 120 mesh
Cabin interior dimensions: 580 x 480 x 300 mm
External dimensions: 590 x 485 x 490 mm

70481-00 Sandblast box ECSSK2


• Large-sized doors for loading and unloading
• Cabin exhaust air opening provided with dirt filter
• 2 exhaust air openings (1 exhaust air connection
ø 92 mm and 1 exhaust air nozzle ø 64 mm)
for connecting a suction system
• High-quality blasting gun with ceramic nozzle
4 ceramic nozzles (4 / 5 /6 / 7 mm)
• 12-volt fluorescent tube with 230-volt power supply
and external switch
• Incl. 5 spare films for the inspection window
• Two large, integrated work gloves made of latex

Technical data: ECSSK2


Working booth volume: 220 l
Air consumption: 200 - 500 l/min
Working pressure: 2,8 - 8,0 bar
Max. working pressure: 8,6 bar
Compressed air connection: 3/8"
Blasting abrasive grain size: 40 - 120 mesh
Cabin interior dimensions: 840 x 550 x 360 mm
External dimensions: 950 x 660 x 1380 mm

7/17
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
7
Compressed
COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY

COMPRESSED AIR TOOLS


air tools

SANDBLASTING

70484-00 Sandblast box ECSSK2,5


• 2 large doors for loading and unloading at both sides,
also for longer workpieces
• Integrated extraction unit with replaceable air filter
• Air flow controlled via foot pedal
• 2 blasting guns: one fixed and one freely-movable
blasting gun
• 3 separate switches for on/off, extraction and cell
lighting
• X 2 neon tubes (230-volt), in separate housing with
protective pane and replaceable protective film,
including 5 replacement films

Technical data: ECSSK2,5


Working booth volume: 310 l
Air consumption: 250 - 350 l/min
Working pressure: 2,8 - 8,0 bar
Max. working pressure: 8,6 bar
Compressed air connection: 3/8"
Blasting abrasive grain size: 0,42 - 0,125 mm
Cabin interior dimensions: 945 x 605 x 605 mm
External dimensions: 960 x 900 x 1640 mm

70485-00 Sandblasting gun ECSPS Pro


• for blasting abrasive up to 0.8 mm grain size
• with suction hose, length 170 cm,
ID 18 mm / AD 24 mm
• with 6-mm hardened blast nozzle
• Weight: 1.2 kg
• Working pressure 5 - 8 bar
• Air consumption 320-420 l

70460-00 Sandblasting gun ST


• With bayonet catch system
• Suitable for grain size 0.2 - 0.8 mm
• Connection: universally suitable standard SK

70470-00 Mobile sand blaster


• Mobile sand blaster for cleaning and rust removal
• Movable with hand rails and large rubber wheels
• Incl. a mounted water separator
• Blasting hose length 2.40 metres with nozzle holder
• Easy to refill by means of a large filling funnel, included in the delivery
• Incl. face mask

7/18
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without prior notice.
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS 8

Standard
tools
STANDARD TOOLS

Open End Spanner Set


81182-00 8-piece
• hardened, chrome plated
• polished jaws
• 6x7-8x9-10x11-12x13-14x15-16x17-
18x19-20x22 mm

81184-00 12-piece
• hardened, chrome plated
• polished jaws
• 6x7-8x9-10x11-12x13-14x15-16x17-18x19-
20x22-21x23-24x27-25x28-30x32 mm

Double open ended spanner sets


0500.08 8-piece
6x7, 8x9, 10x11, 12x13, 14x15, 16x17,
18x19, 20x22

0500.100 10-piece
6x7, 8x9, 10x11, 12x13, 14x15, 16x17,
18x19, 20x22, 24x27, 30x32

0500.120 12-piece
6x7, 8x9, 10x11, 12x13, 14x15, 16x17,
18x19, 20x22, 21x23, 24x27, 25x28, 30x32

Combination Spanner Set


ring side 15° angled
81193-00 8-piece
• chrome plated
• polished jaws and rings
• 8-9-10-12-13-14-17-19 mm

81194-00 12-piece
• chrome plated
• polished jaws and rings
• 6-7-8-9-10-11-12-13-14-17-19-22 mm

81190-00 25-piece
• chrome plated
• polished jaws and rings
• 6-7-8-9-10-11-12-13-14-15-16-17-18-19-
20-21-22-23-24-25-26-27-28-30-32 mm

8/01
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
8
Standard
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS
tools

STANDARD TOOLS

Combination spanner sets


- ring side 15° angled
0900.080 8-piece
8, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 17, 19

0900.100 10-piece
8, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 17, 19, 22

0900.122 12-piece
10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 17, 19, 22, 24, 27, 30, 32

0900.210 21-piece
6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19,
20, 21, 22, 24, 27, 30, 32

Double-Ring Spanner
Set - deep Crank
81209-00 8-piece
• hardened, chrome plated
• polished jaws
• 6x7-8x9-10x11-12x13-14x15-16x17-
18x19-20x22 mm

81214-00 12-piece
• hardened, chrome plated
• polished jaws
• 6x7-8x9-10x11-12x13-14x15-16x17-18x19-
20x22-21x23-24x27-25x28-30x32 mm

Double ended ring spanner


sets - deep offset
0100.08 8-piece
6x7, 8x9, 10x11, 12x13, 14x15, 16x17,
18x19, 20x22

0100.100 10-piece
6x7, 8x9, 10x11, 12x13, 14x15, 16x17,
18x19, 20x22, 24x27, 30x32

0100.120 12-piece
6x7, 8x9, 10x11, 12x13, 14x15, 16x17,
18x19, 20x22, 21x23, 24x27, 25x28, 30x32

Individual wrenches and inch sizes available on request

8/02
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS 8

Standard
tools
STANDARD TOOLS

81761-00 6-piece Flare Nut


Spanner Set
• suitable for daily workshop use
• satin chrome plated
• sizes:
8 x 10 mm, 9 x 11 mm, 12 x 13 mm,
14 x 15 mm 16 x 18 mm, 17 x 19 mm

81596-00 7-piece Ratchet Wrench Set


• satin chrome plated
• double hex. ratcheting ring
• sizes: 8-10-12-13-14-17-19 mm

Reversible ratchet wrench


Sets, switchable
• Straight shap
• Chrome vanadium stee
• Chrom -plated
• Jaw position 15
• Ratchet mechanism with 72 teet
• ery small recovery angle

1700.005 5-piece
8, 10, 13, 17, 19

1700.012 12-piece
8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16,
17, 18, 19

1730.006 Double ratchet wrench


Set, 6-piece
• Straight shap
• Chrome vanadium stee
• Chrom -plated
• Ratchet mechanism with 72 teet
• ery small recovery angle

8x9, 10x11, 12x13, 14x15, 16x18, 17x19

Individual wrenches and inch sizes available on request.

8/03
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
8
Standard
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS
tools

STANDARD TOOLS

81556-00 3-piece 4 in 1 Rachet


Ring Spanner Set
• 3 wrenches with 4 sizes each
• 8 x 9 - 10 x 11 mm
• 12 x 13 - 14 x 15 mm
• 16 x 17 - 18 x 19 mm
• reversible

83090-00 Ratchet box wrench-


Set, 12-piece
•72 tooth
•8-9-10-11-12-13-14-15-16-17-18-19 mm

1512.00 Ratchet box wrench-


Set, 17-piece
• In sheet metal box, 325 x 180 x 45 m
• With lantern piec
• With lever changeove , 15° angled head
Content:
• Ratchet box wrench 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14
15, 16, 17, 18, 19
Outer, square adapter
• 1/4" x 10 m
• 3/8" x 15 m
• 1/2" x 19 m
Inner, hexagon bit adapter
• 1/4" x 8 m
• 5/16" x 13 m

Individual wrenches and inch sizes available on request.

8/04
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS 8

Standard
tools
80285-00 1/4" ratchet
• satin chrome plated
• securely adjustable in 5 positions
• 45 tooth
• with “quick release“ button
• handle with eye

80227-00 1/4" ratchet


• with “quick release“ button and eye
• 2-component rubber handle
• Length: 150 mm

1/4" "Pro Torque®" Socket


82473-00 3,5 mm 82480-00 8,0 mm
82474-00 4,0 mm 82481-00 9,0 mm
82475-00 4,5 mm 82482-00 10,0 mm
82476-00 5,0 mm 82483-00 11,0 mm
82477-00 5,5 mm 82484-00 12,0 mm
82478-00 6,0 mm 82485-00 13,0 mm
82479-00 7,0 mm 82486-00 14,0 mm
80106-50 5/32" 80106-55 5/16"
80106-51 3/16" 80106-56 11/32"
80106-52 7/32" 80106-57 3/8"
80106-53 1/4" 80106-58 7/16"
80106-54 9/32" 80106-59 1/2"

Deep Socket "Pro Torque®" 1/4"


80105-04 4,0 mm 80105-09 9,0 mm
80105-05 5,0 mm 80105-10 10,0 mm
80105-03 5,5 mm 80105-11 11,0 mm
80105-06 6,0 mm 80105-12 12,0 mm
80105-07 7,0 mm 80105-13 13,0 mm
80105-08 8,0 mm 80105-14 14,0 mm

80106-70 1/4" 80106-73 7/16"


80106-71 5/16" 80106-74 1/2"
80106-72 3/8"
8/05
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
8
Standard
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS
tools

1/4" Socket for T-STAR Screws


86404-00 E4 86408-00 E8
86405-00 E5 86430-00 E10
86406-00 E6 86431-00 E11
86407-00 E7

1/4" Bit Socket


int. hex.
82497-00 3 mm 82740-00 3/32"
82498-00 4 mm 82741-00 1/8"
82499-00 5 mm 82742-00 5/32"
82500-00 6 mm 82743-00 3/16"
82501-00 7 mm 82744-00 7/32"
82502-00 8 mm 82745-00 1/4"
82161-10 10 mm 82746-00 9/32"
82161-12 12 mm 82747-00 5/16"
82748-00 3/8"

1/4" Bit Socket 1/4" Bit Socket


T-STAR, tamperproof T-STAR
82356-00 TXB8 82557-00 T7
82364-00 TXB9 82589-00 T8
82357-00 TXB10 82588-00 T9
82358-00 TXB15 82590-00 T10
82359-00 TXB20 82591-00 T15
82360-00 TXB25 82592-00 T20
82361-00 TXB27 82593-00 T25
82362-00 TXB30 82594-00 T27
82363-00 TXB40 82595-00 T30
82165-45 TXB45 82565-00 T35
82165-50 TXB50 82596-00 T40
82164-45 T45
82164-50 T50

Individual wrenches and inch sizes available upon request.

8/06
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS 8

Standard
tools
4004.79 Socket set 1/4" 33 pieces
Contents:
• Reversible ratchet 1/4" with 2-component handle
• Sockets:
hexagon 4 4.5 5 5.5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 mm
• Screwdriver bit sockets:
hexagon 3 4 5 6 8 10 mm
TORX® T10 T15 T20 T25 T27 T30 T40
• Accessories:
Extensions 50 mm, 100 mm
Universal joint
Sliding T-handle
Minimus® interchangeable handle with hex shaft 1/4"
sq. dr. Adaptor 1/4" sq. dr. x 1/4" hex dr.

82145-00 46-piece Socket Set


Contents:
• T-Star sockets NOT tamperproof
• hardness and torque in accordance with DIN
• 1 adapter 1/4" ext. hex. x 1/4" ext.
square head
• 1 spinner handle
• 2 extension bars 50 + 100 mm
• 1 universal joint
• 1 sliding t-bar
• 1 flexible extension bar
• 1 reversible ratchet with quick-release button
• 3 L-type wrenches for int. hexagon: 1,5 - 2 - 3 mm
• 6 T-Star bit-sockets 1/4" drive (NOT tamperproof ):
T-8 - T-30
• 11 bit-sockets 1/4" drive; plain + cross slot, PZ, int. hex.
• 13 "super lock" sockets 1/4" drive: 4 mm - 14 mm

4000 Socket set 1/4" 35 piece


820 203 contents:
• 1 lever changeover ratchet
• Insert key insert 4 - 13 mm
• Internal TORX® T20, T25, T27, T30
• Hexagon socket 3, 4, 5, 6 mm
• Extension with slider 100 mm
• Extension 50 mm
• Handle with square
• Slotted screws 4 - 5.5 mm
• Cross-slot screws
(PH) size 1, 2
• 5 pcs. Hexagonal wrench

8/07
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
8
Standard
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS
tools

80286-00 Flexible Ratchet 3/8"


• satin chrome plated
• head adjustable in 5 positions
• 45 tooth
• with “quick release“ button
• handle with eye
• Length: 270 mm

80319-01 3/8" Reversible Ratchet


• cranked version
• fine 72 tooth
• “quick release“ button
• anti-slip ergonomically formed
2-component handle
• Length: 205 mm

3/8" Socket "Pro Torque®"


80106-10 10 mm 80106-15 15 mm
80106-11 11 mm 80106-16 16 mm
80106-12 12 mm 80106-17 17 mm
80106-13 13 mm 80106-18 18 mm
80106-14 14 mm 80106-19 19 mm

Deep Socket "Pro Torque®" 3/8"


80105-28 8mm 80105-35 15 mm
80105-30 10 mm 80105-36 16 mm
80105-31 11 mm 80105-37 17 mm
80105-32 12 mm 80105-38 18 mm
80105-33 13 mm 80105-39 19 mm
80105-34 14 mm

3/8" Socket for T-STAR Screws


82710-00 E4 86410-00 E10 86417-00 E18
82711-00 E5 86411-00 E11 82715-00 E20
82712-00 E6 86412-00 E12
82713-00 E7 86414-00 E14
82714-00 E8 86416-00 E16

Individual wrenches and inch sizes available upon request.

8/08
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS 8

Standard
tools
3/8" Bit Socket, int. hexagon
82576-00 3 mm 82720-00 1/8"
82577-00 4 mm 82721-00 5/32"
82578-00 5 mm 82722-00 3/16"
82579-00 6 mm 82723-00 7/32"
82580-00 7 mm 82725-00 1/4"
82581-00 8 mm 82730-00 9/32"
82583-00 9 mm 82727-00 5/16"
82582-00 10 mm 82729-00 3/8"
82584-00 12 mm

3/8" Bit Socket 3/8" Bit Socket


T-STAR (tamperproof) T-STAR Screws (without hole)
82571-00 TXB20 82760-00 T10
82572-00 TXB25 82541-00 T15
82573-00 TXB27 82542-00 T20
82574-00 TXB30 82543-00 T25
82575-00 TXB40 82544-00 T27
82597-00 TXB45 82545-00 T30
82599-00 TXB55 82546-00 T40
82547-00 T45
82548-00 T50
82549-00 T55
82761-00 T60

Impact socket 3/8"


6400.006 6 mm 6400.013 13 mm
6400.007 7 mm 6400.014 14 mm
6400.008 8 mm 6400.015 15 mm
6400.009 9 mm 6400.016 16 mm
6400.010 10 mm 6400.017 17 mm
6400.011 11 mm 6400.018 18 mm
6400.012 12 mm 6400.019 19 mm

8/09
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
8
Standard
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS
tools

6600.300 SLIM SIXTY Socket


set 3/8" 22 pieces
Contents:
• SLIM SIXTY Ratchet 3/8": 60 teeth
lever change, push-button release, slim head
• Sockets hexagon
6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18,
19, 20, 21, 22 mm
• Accessories:
Extensions 125 mm, 250 mm
Universal joint
Sliding-T reducer extension 1/2" - 3/8", 200 mm

82227-00 26-piece Socket Set, 3/8"

Contents:
• hardness and torque in accordance with DIN
• “Super Lock“ sockets
• 18 sockets 6-24 mm hex., spiral-knurled,
satin chrome plated
• 3 extension bars 45-75-150 mm hexagon
• 2 spark-plug-sockets 16+21 mm
• 1 universal joint
• reversible ratchet with “quick release“ button
• adaptor 3/8-1/2"

82215-00 61-piece Socket Set,


3/8", in INCH
Contents:
• hardness and torque in accordance with DIN
• bit sockets:
T15-T20-T25-T27 -T30-T40-T45 -T50-T55
• cross slot # 1-3, PZ-type # 1-3
• plain slotted bits 7/32“-15/16"
• bits for int. hex. bolts 1/8“-3/8“
• “Pro Torque“ sockets 1/4"-15/16"
• 10 deep “Pro Torque" sockets 5/16"-3/4"
• 2 spark plug sockets 5/8" + 13/16"
• 1 universal joint 3/8" with spring
• 1 slid. tee bar/extension bar 250mm
• 1 wobble extension bar 75 mm
• 1 fine 72 tooth reversible ratchet
• 1 adaptor 3/8" square head x 8 mm hexagon

8/10
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS 8

Standard
tools
80287-00 Flexible Ratchet 1/2"
• satin chrome plated
• securely adjustable in 5 positions
• 45 tooth
• with “quick release“ button
• handle with eye

80320-00 1/2" Reversible Ratchet


• cranked version
• fine 72 tooth
• “quick release“ button
• anti-slip ergonomically formed
2-component handle
• Length: 255 mm

1/2" Socket for T-STAR Screws


86460-00 E10, short 86440-00 E10, long
86461-00 E11, short 86442-00 E12, long
86462-00 E12, short 86444-00 E14, long
86464-00 E14, short 86446-00 E16, long
86466-00 E16, short 86448-00 E18, long
86418-00 E18, short 86450-00 E20, long
86420-00 E20, short
86422-00 E22, short
86424-00 E24, short

1/2" Socket, Pro Torque®


82908-00 8 mm 82918-00 18 mm
82909-00 9 mm 82919-00 19 mm
82910-00 10 mm 82920-00 20 mm
82911-00 11 mm 82921-00 21 mm
82912-00 12 mm 82922-00 22 mm
82913-00 13 mm 82924-00 24 mm
82914-00 14 mm 82927-00 27 mm
82915-00 15 mm 82930-00 30 mm
82916-00 16 mm 82932-00 32 mm
82917-00 17 mm 82934-00 34 mm
82936-00 36 mm
Individual wrenches and inch sizes available upon request.

8/11
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
8
Standard
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS
tools

Deep Socket "Pro Torque®" 1/2"


80105-50 10 mm 80105-57 17 mm
80105-51 11 mm 80105-58 18 mm
80105-52 12 mm 80105-59 19 mm
80105-53 13 mm 80105-60 20 mm
80105-54 14 mm 80105-61 21 mm
80105-55 15 mm 80105-62 22 mm
80105-56 16 mm 80105-64 24 mm
80105-67 27 mm

1/2" Socket, Pro Torque®


82770-00 3/8" 82775-00 11/16"
82771-00 7/16" 82776-00 3/4"
82772-00 1/2" 82777-00 13/16"
82773-00 9/16" 82778-00 7/8"
82774-00 5/8" 82779-00 15/16"

1/2" Socket, 12-point


80106-28 8 mm 80106-38 18 mm
80106-29 9 mm 80106-39 19 mm
80106-30 10 mm 80106-40 20 mm
80106-31 11 mm 80106-41 21 mm
80106-32 12 mm 80106-42 22 mm
80106-33 13 mm 80106-44 24 mm
80106-34 14 mm 80106-45 27 mm
80106-35 15 mm 80106-46 30 mm
80106-36 16 mm 80106-47 32 mm
80106-37 17 mm 80106-48 34 mm
80106-49 36 mm

Individual wrenches and inch sizes available upon request.

8/12
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS 8

Standard
tools
1/2" Deep Socket, 12-pt
80106-80 10 mm 80106-84 17 mm
80106-62 12 mm 80106-85 18 mm
80106-81 13 mm 80106-86 19 mm
80106-64 14 mm 80106-87 22 mm
80106-82 15 mm 80106-88 24 mm
80106-83 16 mm

1/2" Bit Socket, int. hexagon, 53 mm long


84250-00 4 mm 84256-00 12 mm
84251-00 5 mm 84257-00 14 mm
84252-00 6 mm 85184-17 17 mm
84253-00 7 mm 85184-19 19 mm
84254-00 8 mm 85184-22 22 mm
84340-00 9 mm 85184-24 24 mm
84255-00 10 mm
70 mm long
85052-14 14 mm 85052-18 18 mm
85052-16 16 mm 84295-00 22 mm
100 mm long
84259-00 4 mm 84268-00 9 mm
84260-00 5 mm 84264-00 10 mm
84261-00 6 mm 84266-00 11 mm
84262-00 7 mm 84265-00 12 mm
84263-00 8 mm

1/2" Bit-Socket 1/2" Bit Socket


tamperproof T-STAR, not tamperproof
84326-00 TXB40 84368-00 T15
84327-00 TXB45 84369-00 T20
84328-00 TXB50 84370-00 T25
84329-00 TXB55 84367-00 T27
84376-00 TXB60 84371-00 T30
84377-00 TXB70 84372-00 T40
84373-00 T45
84374-00 T50
84375-00 T55
84378-00 T60
84379-00 T70
8/13
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
8
Standard
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS
tools

5012.00 Socket set 1/2" 24 pieces


Contents:
• Reversible ratchet 1/2" with 2-component handle
• Sockets bi-hexagon
10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 21, 22,
24, 27, 28, 30, 32 mm
• Accessories:
Extensions 75 mm, 125 mm, 250 mm
Universal joint
Sliding T-handle
Adaptor 1/2" sq. dr. x 5/16" hex dr.

82224-00 27-piece Socket Set, 1/2"


Contents:
• sockets in Pro Torque® finish
• fine 72 tooth reversible ratchet
• 2 wobble type extension bars 125 + 250 mm
• 1 adapter for extension bars
• 1 universal joint
• 2 spark plug sockets 16 + 21 mm
• 20 sockets Pro-Torque®following sizes:
8 - 9 - 10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 -
18- 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 27 - 30 - 32
mm

82216-00 27-piece Socket Set, 1/2",


in INCH
Contents:
• sockets in Pro-Torque® finish
• fine 72 tooth reversible ratchet
• 2 wobble type extension bars 125 + 250 mm
• 1 adapter for extension bars/ sliding T-handle
• 2 spark plug sockets 5/8" + 13/16"
• 20 sockets Pro-Torque®
5/16“-11/32“-3/8“-7/16 -15/32“-1/2“-9/16 “-
19/32 - 5/8“-21/32“- 11/16“-3/4“-25/32“-
13/16“-7/8“-15/16“- 1 -1 1/16“ -1 3/16“-1 1/4“

5000.00 Socket set 1/2" 24 pieces


Contents:
• Reversible ratchet 1/2" with 2-component handle
• Sockets hexagon
10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 21, 22,
24, 27, 28, 30, 32 mm
• Accessories:
Extensions 75 mm, 125 mm, 250 mm
Universal joint
Sliding T-handle
Adaptor 1/2" sq. dr. x 5/16" hex dr.

8/14
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS 8

Standard
tools
5800.00 Socket set 1/2" +
1/4" 49 pieces
Contents:
• Reversible ratchet 1/2" with 2-component handle
• Sockets hexagon: 10 - 24 mm
• Extensions 1/2" 75 mm, 125 mm, 250 mm
• Universal joint 1/2"
• Adaptor 1/2" sq. dr. x 5/16" hex dr.
• Ratchet 1/4" with 2-component handle
• Sockets hexagon 1/4": 4 - 13 mm
• Screwdriver bit sockets 1/4":
hexagon 4 5 6 8 mm slotted 5.5 mm cross-head PH 2
cross-head Pozi PZ 2 TORX® with hole TXB10 TXB15
TXB20 TXB25 TXB27 TXB30 TXB40 Extensions 1/4" 50 mm,
100 mm Universal joint 1/4"

4000 Socket Set


820 205 1/2" + 1/4", 55-parts
Inhalt:
• square drive 1/4"
• hexagon socke 4 - 13 mm
• internal TORX® screws T20-T25-T27-T30
• bits for screws with Allen profile in sizes 3-4-5-6 mm
• Extension 50 mm + 150 mm sliding collar
• handle with square drive
• slotted screws 4-5,5 mm
• cross-head screws (PH) size 1 und 2
• hex tool each 1,25-1,5-2,0-2,5-3,0 mm
• square drive 1/2"
• hexagon socket bit 10 - 32 mm
• socket bit each for spark plugs 16, 21 mm
• Extension 75 mm + 250 mm sliding collar

82299-00 92-piece Socket Set,


1/4" + 3/8", in INCH
• sockets in Pro Torque® finish
• 2 fine 72 tooth ratchets 1/4" + 3/8"
• short sockets, 1/4" drive: : 5/32", 3/16",
7/32", 1/4", 9/32", 5/16", 11/32", 3/8", 7/16", 1/2"
• deep sockets, 1/4" drive: 1/4", 5/16", 3/8", 7/16", 1/2"
• 1 bit adaptor 1/4"
• 1 spinner handle 1/4"
• 1 universal joint 1/4"
• 1 extension bar with external hexagon 1/4"
• 1 sliding t-handle with adaptor 1/4"
• short sockets, 3/8" drive:
12,5 (1/2), 9/16", 19/32", 5/8", 11/16", 20 (3/4), 25/32",
13/16", 7/8", 15/16", 1"
• deep sockets, 3/8" drive:: 9/16", 5/8", 11/16", 3/4"
• 1 bit adaptor 3/8"
• 1 universal joint 3/8"
• 1 extension bar 3/8"
• 3 spark plug sockets: 5/8",3/4",13/16"
• 29 pc bit assortment in slot, cross slot, PZ, Internal Hexagon, T Star
• 9 pc Combination Spanner Set:
1/4", 5/16", 3/8", 7/16", 1/2", 9/16", 5/8", 11/16", 3/4"
• internal hexagon keys: 1/16", 5/64", 3/32",
1/8", 5/32", 3/16", 1/4", 5/16", 3/8"
• 1 adaptor 1/4" to 3/8"
8/15
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
8
Torque
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS
wrench

TORQUE WRENCH

Non-binding screw tightening torquese Nm (Newton Meter)


These torques are approximate values for metric coarse-pitch threads according to
DIN ISO 261 and head flange distance according to DIN EN ISO 4762, DIN EN ISO
4032, DIN EN ISO 4014 as well as DIN 931-2, 6912, 7984 and 7990.
They provide a utilisation of the screw yield point of 90%. A 0.14 coefficient
of friction (new bolt, without aftertreatment, unlubricated) was taken as a basis.
Please note: In extreme cases, for example with screws lubricated with MoS2
paste and with connecting elements that are cadmium-plated on both sides,
the tightening value should be reduced by approximately 20%.
M
Tightening values for quality class
according to DIN 267
4.6 5.6 6.9 8.8 10.9 12.9
M 2 0.123 0.162 0.314 0.373 0.520 0.628
M 2.2 0.196 0.265 0.510 0.598 0.843 1.010
M 2.5 0.284 0.373 0.726 0.863 1.206 1.451
M 3 0.441 0.588 1.128 1.344 1.883 2.256
M 3.5 0.677 0.902 1.736 2.060 2.893 3.481
M 4 1.000 1.344 2.599 3.040 4.315 5.148
M 5 1.916 2.648 5.099 6.031 8.483 10.200
M 6 3.432 4.511 8.728 10.300 14.710 17.652
M 7 5.590 7.453 14.220 17.162 24.517 28.439
M 8 8.238 10.787 21.575 25.497 35.304 42.168
M 10 16.67 21.575 42.168 50.014 70.608 85.317
M 12 28.44 38.246 73.550 87.279 122.60 147.10
M 14 45.11 60.801 116.70 138.30 194.20 235.40
M 16 69.63 93.163 178.5 210.80 299.10 357.90
M 18 95.12 127.50 245.20 289.30 411.90 490.30
M 20 135.3 180.45 384.10 411.90 578.60 696.30
M 22 182.4 245.16 470.70 559.00 784.50 941.40
M 24 230.5 308.91 598.20 711.00 1000 1196
M 27 343.2 460.90 887.50 1049 1481 1775
M 30 465.8 622.72 1206 1422 2010 2403
M 33 632.5 848.30 1628 1932 2716 3266
M 36 814.0 1089 2099 2481 3491 4197
M 56 3168 4227 8149 9650 13582 16279

Tightening torques for spark plugs


For spark plug assembly, deduction torques and wrench widths in Nm.
The values apply to light metal cylinders, cast iron heads in clamps.
Spark plugs with flat sealing rings:
Ø Torque Wrench width
10 mm 10 - 12 (10 - 15) SW 16
12 mm 15 - 20 (15 - 25) SW 18
14 mm 25 - 30 (25 - 35) SW 20.8
18 mm 35 - 40 (35 - 40) SW 1 Zoll
Spark plugs with sealing cone:
Ø Torque Wrench width
14 mm 10 - 20 (15 - 25) SW 16
8/16
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS 8

wrench
Torque
TORQUE WRENCH

Quality torque wrench for the toughest demands


Torque wrench
Use:
• Controlled screw tightenin
• or use in all industrial production areas
Design:
• Adjustable torque wrench with square drive an
integrated ratchet function
• or controlled bi-directional tightening
• Release accuracy: +/-3% tolerance of the set scale valu
• Dual scale for N·m and Ibf·f
Supply of delivery:
• orque wrench with test certificate according to DIN EN ISO 6789
• Operating instruction
• Carrying bag made of nylo

4900.025 1/4" / 5 - 25 Nm
• with mushroom head, fine tuning 0.1 N

6900.070 3/8" / 14 - 70 Nm
• with mushroom head, fine tuning 0.25 N

5900.100 1/2" / 20 - 100 Nm


• with mushroom head, fine tuning 0.5 N

5900.200 1/2" / 40 - 200 Nm


• with mushroom head, fine tuning 1.0 N

5900.300 1/2" / 60 - 300 Nm


• with mushroom head, fine tuning 1.0 N

Torque wrench
with flex ratchet handle, workshop quality,
set value can be blocked. Import-Modell
80392-0L 1/4” / 6- 30 Nm
80390-5L 3/8” / 19 - 110 Nm
80393-3L 1/2” / 40 - 210 Nm

Individual wrenches and inch sizes available upon request.


8/17
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
8 STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS
Specials

SPECIALS

Pliers wrench
"when the suitable wrench is missing"

Pliers and screw-wrench in a single


tool. The patented pliers wrench is
a multifunctional screw, gripping and
retaining tool with fast adjustment at the
press of button. The high gear ratio, the parallel
jaws without profile and the continuous
adjustment guarantee safe, zero backleash.
and smooth workpiece gripping.

86110-00 180 mm / 35 mm wrench size

86110-01 250 mm / 46 mm wrench size

86110-02 300 mm / 60 mm wrench size

80300-00 Reducers and


connecting pieces
In the sturdy order plastic case,
chrome vanadium steel, chrome-plated.
It includes all dimensions between
1/4" and 3/4" as drive and downthrust

80299-70 Reducers and


connecting pieces
Suitable for impact screwdrivers
It contains all dimensions between
1/4" and 3/4" as drive and downthrust

85265-00 10-piece Special


Twist Socket Set, 3/8"
• black bronzed surface
• for loosening damaged screws and nuts
• suitable for impact screwdrivers
• the innovative spiral profile digs itself into the
head of a damaged screw/nut and thereby allows
to loosen it securely
• sizes: 10-11-12-13-14-15-16-17-19 mm

80359-00 Magnetic lifter


Flexible aluminium shaft which can be bent in any position
and remains in this position.
Very strong magnet. Total length 552 mm

Individual wrenches and inch sizes available upon request.

8/18
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS 8

Assortment
BIT ASSORTMENT

Bit-
85181-00 30-piece 1/2" Drive Internal
Hexagon Bit-Assortment
• short bits S2-Steel
• satin chrome plated, knurled
• Length: 55, 100, 140, 200 mm
• 5-19 mm

85182-00 32-piece 1/2" Drive T-Star


Bit-Assortment
• short bits S2-Steel
• satin chrome plated, knurled
• Length: 55, 100, 140, 200 mm
• T20-T70 (not tamperproof)

4000
829 645
Bit assmnt., 62-parts
• colour-coding system
• features high-quality bits for use in bit hand holders and
power tools, with excellent hardness and
torque properties and two bit holders

• 1/4" hex drive DIN 3126 - C6,3


Feature:
Via the colour-coding system you can identify the
output type at a glance:
Flat-blade screwdriver bits: dark orange
PH cross-head bits: red
PZD cross-head bits: blue
Hexagon bits: light orange
bits for internal TORX®-screws: yellow
• Contents:
1 Bit holder with strong permanent magnet
1 bit holder with quick change chuck suitable for bits with
C6.3 and E6.3 drive (also for long bits)
3 each flat-blade screwdriver bits size 4 mm - 6 mm
3 each PH cross-head bits size 1 and 3 (Phillips-Recess)
6 PH cross-head bits size 2 (Phillips-Recess)
3 each PZD cross-head bits size 1 and 3 (Pozidriv)
6 each PZD cross-head bits size 2 (Pozidriv)
3 each hexagon bits for Allen screws, size 4 mm - 6 mm
3 each bits for internal TORX® screws, size T10-T15-T20-T25-
T27-T30-T40

Individual wrenches and inch sizes available upon request.

8/19
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
8 STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS
Assortment

BIT ASSORTMENT
Bit-

4000
829 653
Bit assortment, 31-piece
•in robust metal box
• excellent hardness and torque propertie
• Drive 6.3 mm, (1/4") hexagonal, DIN 3126 - C 6.
Content:
• 1 bit retainer with magnet
• 1 bit each for cross slotted-head screws, size 4.5 - 5.5 - 6.5 m
• 3 bits each for cross slotted-head screws P , size 1 - 2 - 3/25 mm
• 3 bits each for cross slotted-head screws PZ , size 1 - 2 - 3/25 mm
• 1 bit each for inner ORX® screws
size T10-T15-T20-T25-T30-T40 per 1
• Hexagon bit, size 4 - 5 - 6/25 m

4000
829 654
Bit assortment, 31-piece
•in metal case
• excellent hardness and torque propertie
• Drive 6.3 mm, (1/4") hexagonal, DIN 3126 - C 6.
Content:
• 1 bit retainer with magnet and quick-change chuck
• 1 bit each for slotted-head screws, size 4.5 - 5.5 - 6.5 m
• 3 bits each for cross slotted-head screws P , size 1 - 2 - 3/25 mm
• 3 bits each for cross slotted-head screws PZ , size 1 - 2 - 3/25 mm
• 1 bit each for inner ORX® screws
size T10-T15-T20-T25-T30-T40 per 1
• hexagon bit size 4 - 5 - 6/25 m

4000 Bit assortment, 30-piece


829 662 with long bits
fitted with high-quality RiBo bits made of S2 steel
with excellent hardness and torque properties
Content:
• per 1 RiBo bit for slotted-head screws size 4 mm,
5.5 mm, 6.5 mm
• 1 RiBo bit each for cross slotted-head screw
PH size 1 - 3 mm
• 2 RiBo bits for cross slotted-head screws P , size 2
• 2 RiBo bits each for cross slotted-head screws PZ
size 1 - 2 - 3
• 1 bit each for inner ORX® screws, size
T10 - T15 - T20 - T25 - T27 - T30 - T40
• 1 bit each with bore for inner ORX® screws
with locking pin size T10 - T15 - T20 - T25 - T30 - T40
• 1 hexagon bit each for inner hexagon screw
3 mm - 4 mm - 5 mm - 6 mm
Special features:
• all bits 50-mm long, thus also best suited for
deep screws
• fitted with RiBo recess and cross recess bit
RiBo-Bits:
With RiBo it is possible to reduce the ejection forces, and thus the
fastening times as well as the tool and screw wear,
thereby reducing the cost per screw connection.
The service life of the bits is clearly increased.

Individual bits and inch sizes available on request.

8/20
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS 8

And t-wrench
ANGLE SCREWDRIVER

screwdriver
Angle
AND T-WRENCH

80807-00 9-piece Internal Hexagon


Key Set
• short type
• premium quality
• 1,5-2-2,5-3-4-5-6-8-10 mm

80790-00 9-piece Internal Hexagon Key Set


• supplied in a foldable plastic holder
• long side with ball end
• includes the following sizes
• 1,5, 2, 2,5, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10 mm

80799-00 9-piece Internal Hexagon Key Set, in INCH


• chrome plated
• long side with ball end
• inch sizes: 1/16“, 5/64“, 3/32“, 1/8“, 5/32“,
3/16“, 1/4“, 5/16“, 3/8“

80793-00 9-piece T-STAR Key Set


• extra long type
• T10-15-20-25-27-30-40-45-50
• not tamperproof

T-wrench - Inbus®
• Chrome vanadiu
• Polypropylene handhold
• Chrom -plated blade, burnished tip

86082-76 2,5 mm
86082-77 3 mm
86082-78 4 mm
86082-79 5 mm
86082-80 6 mm
86082-81 8 mm
86082-82 10 mm

Individual sizes available on request.

8/21
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
8 STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS
And t-wrench
screwdriver

ANGLE SCREWDRIVER AND T-


Angle

WRENCH

88484-00 8-piece T-Handle Wrench Set


• 2 x 90 mm, 2,5 x 100 mm, 3 x 115 mm
4 x 120 mm, 5 x 140 mm, 6 x 160 mm
8 x 175 mm, 10 x 200 mm
• two-sided use, short and long shaft
• ergonomic handles
• metal bracket with mounting holes

T-wrench - TORX®
• Chrome vanadiu
• Polypropylene handhold
• Chrom -plated blade, burnished tip

86071-71 TX 6 86071-77 TX 20
86071-72 TX 7 86071-78 TX 25
86071-73 TX 8 86071-79 TX 27
86071-74 TX 9 86071-80 TX 30
86071-75 TX 10 86071-81 TX 40
86071-76 TX 15 86071-82 TX 45

T-wrench in GP technology; OMEGA Speed-GP


the mounted grab handhold increases the
rotational speed thus reducing
assembly times.

86051-00 BIT seating


Drehgriff
it fits every zur exakten
Führung

86051-10 1/4” Plug socket


it fits every
86051-20 3/8” Plug socket
it fits every
86051-30 1/2” Plug socket

8/22
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS 8

Pliers
PLIERS

80370-00 Combination Pliers


• matt chrome plated
• with slip guard / soft grip handles
• 175 mm

80395-00 Heavy Duty Diagonal


Side Cutter
• matt chrome plated
• with slip guard / soft grip handles
• 180 mm
80373-00 Bent Nose Pliers
• matt chrome plated
• with slip guard / soft grip handles
• 200 mm

80378-00 Flat Nose Pliers


• matt chrome plated
• with slip guard / soft grip handles
• 160 mm

Waterpump Pliers
• professional quality
• high quality lacquered black finish
• forged , hardened,
• polished jaws and joint
• PVC dipped handles

80751-10 175 mm
80751-11 240 mm
80751-12 300 mm
Water pump pliers
Knipex - Alligator
• channel-lock join
• chrome vanadium electrical stee
• self-locking on pipes and nut
• oil-hardene
• ja , induction-hardened
• chrom -plated head
• ergonomic handle with 2 component grips
4000
810 680 180 mm - 30 mm Span
4000
810 682 250 mm - 46 mm Span
4000
810 683 300 mm - 60 mm Span
Individual pliers and versions available on request.
8/23
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
8 STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS
Pliers

PLIERS

80752-05 Self-Adjusting Water


Pump Pliers
• 240 mm
• suitable for work pieces up to 48 mm

80447-00 4-piece Circlip Pliers Set


• straight and bent tips
• for internal and external circlips
• non-slip cushion grip handles
• pliers tip Ø 2.0 mm
• max. opening:
• external circlip pliers (angled) 30 mm
• external circlip pliers (straight) 39 mm
• internal circlip pliers (angled) 35 mm
• internal circlip pliers (straight) 38 mm
• packed in a solid vinyl wallet

Professional pointed
jaw pliers set
extra-long version (about 280 mm)
Straight, 45° + 90°

86078-80 3-piece set

86078-90 Straight version

86078-91 Tip, 45° bent

86078-92 Tip, 90° bent

Individual pliers and versions available on request.

8/24
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS 8

Pliers
PLIERS

Gripping pliers
• or clamping and tightening profiled, round and
flat material
• With adjusting screw and release leve
• Nickel-plated surfac

2820.07 185 mm, 7"


2820.10 225 mm, 10"
2820.12 295 mm, 12"

81480-00 Spring loaded Wire Spinning Pliers


200 mm
• black lacquered
• polished head
• for professional screw locking
• wire diameters up to 0.8 mm

88478-00 Screw Securing Wire


• 0,7 mm, stainless steel
• Role with 15 mtr.

81410-00 Crimping Tool Set with


5 Pairs of Jaws
• Crimping tool set with ratcheting
function and adjustable jaws
• includes 5 exchangeable crimping jaws for:
• closed non-insulated terminal ends:
AWG 20-18 / 16-14 / 12-10 / 8
DIN 1,5 / 2,5 / 6 / 10 mm²
JIS 1,25 / 2 / 5,5 / 8 mm²
• insulated terminal ends:
AWG 22-18 / 16-14 / 12-10
DIN 0,5-1,0 / 1,5-2,5 / 4-6 mm²
• open, non-insulated terminal end:
AWG 22-18 / 16-14 / 12-10
DIN 0,5-1,0 / 1,5-2,5 / 4-6 mm²
• small, insulated terminal end:
AWG 22-18 / 16-14 / 12-10
DIN 0,5-1,0 / 1,5-2,5 / 4-6 mm²
• big, insulated terminal end:
AWG 10 / 8 / 16
DIN 6 / 10 / 16 mm²
• Supplied in an acid-proof blow mould case.

Individual pliers and versions available on request.

8/25
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
8 STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS
Pliers

PLIERS

80402-00 Professional Riveter


suitable for rivets made of aluminum,
copper and steel
diameters of 2.4 - 3.2 - 4.0 - 4.8 mm

84275-0L Riveter
heavy duty finish
with four nozzles to accept
2,4-3,0-4,0-4,8 mm rivets

84280-0L Riveter Set


incl. 60 assorted rivets
riveter
supplied with four nozzles to
accept 2,4-3,0-4,0-4,8 mm
rivets

80405-00 Professional Riveter Set


• aluminium and steel rivets
• 3,2 - 4,0 - 4,8 - 5,0 - 6,4 mm
• suitable for rivet nut
M4, M5, M6, M8 und M10
• incl. draw bar for riveter
M4, M5, M6, M8 und M10
• rivet stroke: max. 20 mm
• handles can be folded

88463-00 Plastic Rivet Kit


• for riveting e.g. plastic panels in
the vehicle interior
• includes:
• 1 riveter
• 40 plastic rivets in following sizes:
• 10 Ø5,0 x 15,8 mm
• 10 Ø5,0 x 17,2 mm
• 10 Ø6,6 x 17,2 mm
• 10 Ø6,3 x 25,2 mm
• suitable for plastic rivets with
mandrel diameter 2 - 4.5 mm

Individual pliers and versions available on request.


8/26
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS 8

Screwdriver
SCREWDRIVER

80182-82 Screwdriver set


• 6-piece set and rack for wall mountin
• 4 x recess: 0,6 x 3,5 x 80 mm, 0,8 x 4,5 x 90 mm
1,0 x 5,5 x 100 mm, 1,2 x 7,0 x 125 mm
• 2 x cross: PH 1/80, PH 2/10
• Screwdriver with permanent blade, fo
particularly tough cases and particularly seized
screws.

81056-50 Screwdriver set


• 6-piece set and rack for wall mountin
• 4 x recess: 0,5 x 3,0 x 80 mm, 0,8 x 4,0 x 100 mm
1,0 x 5,5 x 125 mm, 1,2 x 6,5 x 150 mm
• 2 x cross: PH 1/80, PH 2/10
• Screwdriver with round blade and laser tip, it cling
firmly to the screw head without slipping out.

4000 Screwdriver set


827 720 XXL, 12-piece
• with multi component Kraftform handles
• with hexagon slip protectio
• blades made of molybdenum vanadium stee
Content:
• 1 screwdriver each, VDE insulated fo
slotted-head screws 2.5 x 80 mm - 3.5 x 100 mm
• 1 voltage tester 3.0 x 70 m
• 1 screwdriver for slotted-head screw
4,0 x 100 mm
• 1 screwdriver each for slotted-head screws wit
permanent hexagon blade, impact cap and
hexagon attachment 5.5 x 100 - 7.0 x 125 mm,
with Black Point tip and wrench aid (for
screws and chisels)
• 1 screwdriver for cross slotted-head screw
PH 2 x 100 mm
• 1 screwdriver each for cross slotted-head screw
PZD 1 x 80 - 2 x 100 mm
• 1 screwdriver each for inner ORX® screws
T15 - T20 - T25 100 mm length: gold-plated tips
with laser tip - thereby avoiding unintentional
slipping out of the screw

Single screwdrivers available on request.

8/27
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
8
Screwdriver
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS

SCREWDRIVER

3603.000 Screwdriver set


6-piece
• Blades made of alloy steel in hig
SVCM quality
• Chrom -plated surface with black tip
• 2 component handle
• PP hard components and TPV anti slip
soft components
Content:
3, 5.5, 6.5 mm recess screwdrivers
PH 0, PH 1, PH 2 cross-recess screwdrivers

80730-00 2-piece Screwdriver Set,


EXTRA LONG
• Length 450 mm

3690.000 Screwdriver set


6-piece
• Blades made of alloy steel in hig
SVCM quality
• Chrom -plated surface with black tip
• 2 component handle
• PP hard components and TPV anti slip
soft components
Content:
• TORX®-Screwdrivers
T10, T15, T20, T25, T30, T40

82325-00 8-piece TS and T-Star


Screwdriver Set
•Length 300 mm
• one double ended blade with TS-/T profile in each of the
following sizes: 10-15-20-25-27-30-40
• all blades with tamperproof heads
• one handle fits all sizes

Single screwdrivers available on request.

8/28
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS 8

instruments
Measuring
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

Straightedge
Hardened, ground and lapped measuring edges,
with thermal hand protection, bright steel design

80137-00 300 mm
80141-00 400 mm
80139-00 500 mm

Straightedge Rust-free design

80135-00 300 mm
80138-00 400 mm
80136-00 500 mm

Bevelled steel square


Hardened, two hairline measuring edges, finely
ground and lapped, finely ground flat sides,
without fence, rust-free

80142-00 Dimensions 75 x 50 mm,


cross section 20 x 7 mm

80142-10 Dimensions 100 x 70 mm,


cross section 20 x 7 mm

80150-00 Prism pairs


Made of hardened cast steel.

Delivery in numbered pairs

Recess dimensions 100 x 65 mm, height 50 mm

80143-00 Degree wheel


anti-glare and easy to read, with a central
locating bore, Ø 100 mm, 0-360 degrees

80143-50 Degree wheel


Matt chrome-plated steel, bore 8H7 mm,
Ø 150 mm, 0-360 degrees

80151-00 Measuring and test plate


630 x 400 x 100 mm

Compressive strength 250 - 260 N/mm²

corrosion-free, thermally and dynamically stable

Granite ground

8/29
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
8 STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS
instruments
Measuring

MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

Calliper
in PVC bag, 4-fold measurement, rust-free

80127-00 Measuring range 150 mm


80127-01 Measuring range 200 mm

80130-60 Metal digital


calliper
from 0 to 150 mm, resolution: 0.01 mm
LC display, zero setting in any position
mm and inch display

80128-00 Calliper for


brake discs
with extra-long strap to measure the
brake disc in installed condition
- hardened test prods
- with locking screw and vernier scale

80140-00 Measuring instrument set


Basic equipment:
– 150-mm calliper
– 0 – 25 mm external micrometer
– Rust-free, 100-mm bevelled steel square
– Rust-free, 200-mm measuring stick

80149-00 Scriber,
pocket-sized
Length 150 mm, hexagonal with carbide tip,
chrome-plated

4000
858 990 250-mm scriber
• with knurled grid
• galvanised, burnished needle, hardened, screwed-i
• one side 90° bent, the other side straigh

8/30
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS 8

instruments
Measuring
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

External micrometer
Precision micrometer

80110-00 0 - 25 mm
80111-00 25 - 50 mm
80112-00 50 - 75 mm
80113-00 75 - 100 mm
80114-00 100 - 125 mm
80115-00 125 - 150 mm

80116-00 Micrometer set


in a wooden box,
measuring range 0 - 100 mm, 4 pieces

80116-01 Micrometer set


in a wooden box,
measuring range 0 - 150 mm, 6 pieces

80115-10 Micrometer holder


for precision external micrometer
up to 200 mm

80117-00 Dial gauge


Precision timepiece, 0 - 10 mm, diam. 58 mm,
metal housing, reading 0.01 mm
4000
851 530 Digital dial gauge
5-digit LCD display, autom. shutdown,
power button, zero adjustment, outside Ø 58 mm,
clamping shaft (Ø 8 mm h6)

OT measuring instrument
Micrometer dial, spark plug adapter,
extension 32 / 52 / 62 / 72

80123-00 M14 x 1,25

80123-10 M12 x 1,25

80123-20 M10 x 1

8/31
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
8 STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS
instruments
Measuring

MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

88319-00 TDC Dial Indicator for


Ignition Adjusting
• precision gauge for locating the piston TDC
• allows precise ignition timing
• suitable for most cylinder heads
• spark plug thread adapter in 10 and 14 mm
• includes:
• 1 gauge 10 mm stroke, 1/100mm graduation
• 1 adapter with gauge clamp, length 3 cm
• 1 extension M8x1.0, length 3 cm
• 1 adapter M10x1.0
• 1 adapter M14x1.25
• 2 stylus extensions

Internal precision
measuring instrument
with dial gauge

80131-00 6 - 10 mm

80132-00 10 - 18 mm

80133-00 18 - 35 mm

80133-01 35 - 50 mm
Internal precision
measuring instrument
Industrial quality, carbide measuring pin
without dial gauge
80131-50 15 - 35 mm
80132-50 30 - 100 mm
80133-50 50 - 178 mm

80124-00 Magnetic measuring rods


- sturdy, special steel measuring rods
- with fine adjustment on the dial gauge holder
- prismatic magnetic base that can be turned off
H 300 mm, base 65 x 55 x 50
Rod system 12mm, holding force: 60 kg
M8 threaded connection

80125-00 Measuring rods


M8 thread without magnet

80126-50 Measuring instrument set


2-pc., magnetic measuring stand with timepiece
in a protective case

8/32
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS 8

Chain
tools
CHAIN TOOLS

Chain cutting and


riveting tool
80786-00 Chain size 420, 428

80787-00 Chain size 520, 525, 530, 532

80788-00 Chain size 630, 632

81743-00 Chain Breaker


to separate motorcycle O-Ring, X-
Ring and conventional chains

88802-00 Riveting Tool for


Motorcycle Chains
• for separating and riveting chains
• suitable for hollow rivet chain locks,
for chain sizes 35 - 525
• 3 separating tips included: 2.2 - 2.9 - 3.8 mm

88867-00 21-piece Motorcycle


Chain Tool Set
• is required when replacing motorcycle chains
• includes the following 3 chain service tools:
• chain lock clip pliers for removal and installation
of chain lock clips
• chain holding tool, holds both ends of
the chain together
• extensive chain link separating and riveting tool,
for disassembly and assembly of drive and
timing chains
• drift punch diameter: 2.2 - 2.9 - 3.8 - 4.8 mm

80789-00 Chain cutting and


riveting tool for
hollow rivet chains
DID original
Chain size 520, 525, 530, 532

8/33
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
8 STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS
processing
Engine

ENGINE PROCESSING

80426-00 Valve spring compressor


For fast, perfect work on dismantled
cylinder heads.
Adjustable, suitable for almost all types of cylinder
heads no matter if 1- or 4-cylinder models.

Delivered with 2 different heads.

This tool reduces


assembly and disassembly times
significantly. MADE BY ECON

80426-50 Valve spring


Tensioner set
5 different heads 16, 19, 23, 25
and 30 mm

Import Model

80427-00 Shim pliers


- 40° angled, flat, wide jaws
- polished, plastic-coated handle

Valve seat cutter


Individual milling heads - size and angle
details see list

80901-00 Motorcycle set, large


Valve seat diameter: 13 - 38 mm,
Valve shaft diameter: 4, 5, 5.5, 6, 7 mm
• Milling head Ø 19 mm - milling range: 13 – 20 m
• 1 head each with a 15°, 45
and 60° angle
• Milling head Ø 31.6 mm - milling range: 22 – 38 m
• 1 head each with 15 x 75° angle, 31° angle and 46° angl
• Pilots: 100-4, 100-5, 100-5.5, 140-5, 140-6, 150-
• Storage box: CA 160, turning handle: 505-1/2“
reduction, operating instructions, tools

80904-00 Motorcycle set, medium


Valve seat diameter: 13 - 27 mm,
Valve shaft diameter: 4, 5, 5.5, 6, 7 mm
• Milling head Ø 19 mm - milling range: 13 – 20 m
• 1 head each with a 15°, 45° and 60° angl
• Milling head Ø 24.4 mm - milling range: 15 - 27 m
• 1 head each with a 46°, 60° and 15° angl
• Pilots: 100-4, 100-5, 100-5.5, 140-5, 140-6, 150-
• Storage box: CA 160, turning handle: 513-3/8“
operating instructions, tools

8/34
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS 8

processing
Engine
ENGINE PROCESSING

Valve seat cutter


Individual milling heads - size and angle details
see list

80905-00 Motorcycle set, small


Valve seat diameter: 13 - 20 mm,
Valve shaft diameter: 4, 5, 5,5 mm
• Milling head Ø 19 mm - milling range: 13 – 20 mm
• 1 head each with 15 x 15° angle, 45° angle and 60° angl
• Pilots: 100-4, 100-5, 100-5.
• Storage box: CA 303, turning handle: 513-3/8“
operating instructions, tools

80906-00 Motorcycle set, small 2


Valve seat diameter: 15 - 20 mm,
Valve shaft diameter: 4, 5, 5.5, 6, 7 mm
• Milling head Ø 25.4 mm - milling range: 15 – 27 mm
• 1 head each with 46° angle, 60° angle and 15° angl
• Pilots: 100-4, 100-5, 100-5.5, 120-6, 120-
• Storage box: CA 160, turning handle: 513-3/8“
operating instructions, tools

80902-00 Valve cone


milling tool
16-54 mm plate diameter,
3.8-13 mm shaft diameter

80903-00 Quick turning handle


for valve cutters

Valve lapper
tool
For lapping valves by hand,
each time with two different large
rubber lapping heads

80365-00 16-21 mm valve,


length 210 mm
80366-00 29-35 mm valve,
length 225 mm

8/35
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
8 STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS
processing

ENGINE PROCESSING
Engine

80100-XX Feeler gauges


with plastic handle
Available from 0.03 mm in increments of 0.01 mm.
Order number for feeler gauges 80100 + size.
For example, 0.08 feeler gauge = 80100-08

Feeler gauges
Conical, steel small blades, width 12.7 mm,
4000 length 200 mm, bundled on a ring
858 466 8 blade - 0,05 - 0,5
858 467 13 blade - 0,05 - 1,0
858 468 20 blade - 0,05 - 1,0, 0,05 increments

Valve feeler gauge


in a nickel-plated casing

80101-00 0,05 - 1,00 mm / 13 blade


80102-00 0,05 - 1,00 mm / 20 blade
Cylinder honing
cleaning devices
80160-00 2 Arms / 19 - 56 mm
80161-00 3 Arms / 19 - 64 mm
80162-00 3 Arms / 32 - 90 mm
80164-00 3 Arms / 51 - 178 mm

Spare segments
80161-01 Fine grain size, 28 mm
80161-02 Normal grain size, 28 mm
80162-01 Fine grain size, 50 mm
80162-02 Normal grain size, 50 mm
80163-01 Fine grain size
for 80163 + 80164
80163-02 Rough grain size
for 80163 + 80164
Operating instructions
1.. Tighten honing device in bori 4. Always ensure good lubrication.
machine chuck 5. During the working process make
2.. Completely clamp honing ston sure that all honing stones are and
in cylinder. will remain completely in the cylinder.
3.. If necessa , change clamping 6. Move honing device up and down
pressureby turning the clamping to achieve a uniform honing effect.
nut.
Do not overtighten.
8/36
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS 8

and injection
carburettors
TOOL FOR CARBURETTORS

systems
Tool for
AND INJECTION SYSTEMS

80900-00 Carburettor holder


So as to perform professional work on
carburettors the carburettor holder should be
available in every workshop. This tool makes it
easy to disassemble or adjust a carburettor.
The float gauge levels of multiple carburettor
systems can be easily adjusted. All important parts
are easily accessible so many assembly defects
can be avoided. Petrol runs into a catch basin that
can be separately removed. The carburettor
system can be turned by 360°; the replaceable MADE BY ECON
Teflon jaws protect the carburettor housing.

80863-10 Carburettor adjustment


tool set
- 10 piece
- To adjust the carburettor mixture
or synchronisation screws
- 90° angled
- Adapter: 5 mm x 4 mm long,
5 mm x 10 mm long
5 mm x 19 mm long,
5 mm x 42 mm long,
5 mm x 78 mm long, 2 x 18 mm long,
2 x 40 mm long

Plastic hose
pincher
10145-00 Æ
up to 16 mm
10146-00 Æ
up to 28 mm
10147-00 Æ
up to 13 - 57 mm 3-piece Feststellring

80616-00 Jet reamer set


16 pcs with interchangeable grip with quiver
0.33 – 2.0 mm

80616-50 Jet reamer set


12 pcs with interchangeable grip with quiver
0.6 – 1.4 mm

80617-00 Jet reamer set


6-piece with fixed grip 0.4 – 1.4 mm,
in a self-service case

8/37
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
8
and injection
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS
carburettors

TOOL FOR CARBURETTORS


systems
Tool for

AND INJECTION SYSTEMS

vernier gauge reading


80614-00 Jet gauges
with vernier gauge reading 0-3 m

80615-00 with vernier gauge reading 0 - 5 mm

Jet gauges
• with steel pins contained in plasti
• shell made of steel with locking scre
4000
858 810 0,45 - 1,50 mm - number of pins 20
858 811 1,50 - 3,00 mm - number of pins 16

Conical hole gauge


• made of steel; high-precision pitchin
• hardened and finely groun
• cone 1:1
4000
858 815 1 - 6 mm - Reading 0,1 mm
858 816 4 - 15 mm - Reading 0,1 mm

4000
851 410 Thread gauge
• for internal and external measurement
• recision design combining:
60° metric and pipe threads
• 55° Whitwort
• 52 blade

88017-00 Carburetor Screwdriver


For adjusting Pierburg carburetors, 360
mm long

86120-01 Hand screwdriver


for standard bits and ratchet seating.

Ideal, when it gets particularly tight,


i.e. mixture regulation

8/38
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS 8

Chassis
CHASSIS

90890-00 KOMBI fork and suspension


strut mounting press
Our tool to assemble and disassemble
shock absorbers.

As easy as it gets: no matter whether a shock absorber


or a fork, length can be set in the blink of an
eye and the suitable adapter is quickly at hand.

Pre-loading is performed hydraulically.

Quick and, above all, safe.

It can be used for most systems available


on the market.

90360-00 Suspension strut press


With the suspension strut press, you can easily
disassemble and reassemble the spring of a
suspension strut.
The tool made of solid steel can be secured on a
workbench for you to work safely.

98521-00 Spring clamp for


central spring strut
• 4 adapters allow use for many coil spring
sizes
• Adapter in 60 - 66 - 72 and 75 mm
• With eyelet and fork adapter
• A tool for great time saving
• Made of aluminum

90991-00 2-piece Motorcycle Spring Compressor Kit


• facilitates assembly of springs on the spring strut
• max opening width 100 mm
• 3/8“ and 17 hex. drive
• rubber protection on the tensioning claws prevent
damage to the spring coating
• made from high grade steel
• housing is made from stainless steel
• suitable for cylindrical springs with
a wire diameter up to 11 mm

8/39
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
8 STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS
Chassis

CHASSIS

90913-00 Fork Mover Ring


Intrusion Set
• Steel case
• 5 Plastic inserts
Polyoxymethylene
40/41 - 42/43 - 45/46
47/48 - 49/50

98895-00 Fork Seal Driver


• for installing seals into motorcycle forks
• adjustable for fork diameter from 35 to 45 mm
• suitable for many motorcycle types

Rotary clamping

90390-00 Universal mounting


clamp
A holder for all those who frequently have
to carry out work on forks or suspension
struts. The plastic-coated clamping jaws are Rubberised
specially shaped to collect round parts cheeks
without damage. The parts can then be
pivoted and stopped in every position.

For fork and strut.

90350-00 Pretension tool


for fork springs
With this unique tool you have the opportunity
to pretension the fork spring through one-
man operation on the most popular forks.
Thus, the locking screw of the piston rod can
be removed both in a mounted and
dismantled fork.

MADE BY ECON
8/40
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS 8

Chassis
CHASSIS

85062-00 Fork Cap Wrench for


Öhlins Forks
• suitable for most Öhlins models
• disassembly and assembly of the upper
fork tube caps
• rubber pad prevents damage to the nut
• material: aluminum alloy steel, anodized
• 1/2" and 6-pt drive

80020-00 Spring balance


Application area
- Determination of the actual weight
in 25-g increments, max. 2.5 kg
- Inspection of steering head bearing pretension

Fork wrench for quad


axle nuts
80550-00 42 mm

80551-00 46 mm

80552-00 50 mm

Fork tool
Tool for counterholding the fastening screw
in conventional forks

80630-00 5 - 13 mm

80631-00 14 - 17 mm

80632-00 Fork depressor


for the most common upside-down forks

8/41
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
8 STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS
Chassis

CHASSIS

80910-00 ECON - Steering head


bearing puller
Special tool for the careful and easy
removal of bearings, i.e. the fork crown.
Incl. 35-40 and 40-45 mm collets

Für alle gängigen Lenkkopflager einsetzbar.

90910-10 30-35 mm collet MADE BY ECON


90910-20 45-50 mm collet

90910-30 Collet nut


required with 45-50 mm collet

Steering head
bearing tool
Our ejector drift for bearing shells out of the frame
can be delivered in two sizes. Easy handling for all
bearing shells slightly protruding in the frame.
In fact, the tool rests right here and allows the
operator to quickly and gently eject the bearing shell.
Suitable for scooters and motorcycles.
The tool is simply pulled into the steering tube (from
the bottom upwards); through pretension, it can fit
closely and evenly in the inner tube.

80907-00 Size 1, 26 - 35 mm

80908-00 Size 2, 35 - 55 mm

80921-00 Set consists of sizes 1 and 2

8/42
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS 8

Chassis
CHASSIS

80909-00 Bearing-Press
With the help of this tool bearings
can be easily pressed.
Extremely useful with steering head
bearings and wheel bearings.

80925-00 Bearing installation


tool TIPP este e
n
en!
frteaig
n
r
ahmM
l a b
o
g
k z
i s
euc
B ecrs
ü
ern
tnzm
eeinnue
Those who would like to easily mount
Ham
their bearings without damaging the
lower fork crown cannot do without
this tool.

The aluminium attachments allow a


damage-free mounting of the
bearing.

3 different attachments allow


mounting on most fork crowns.

85111-0L Recoilless
hammer
65 mm Æ
, Steel cane handle

80840-02 Bearing installation tool


set
9-piece bearing and sealing ring set for
flush and centred driving
of bearing rings and tapered roller bearings.

Sizes:
40-44-50-59-63-65-72-76-81

8/43
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
8 STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS
Puller

PULLER

80716-00 Flywheel puller set


• suitable for Yamaha, Honda, Suzuki, Bosch,
Kawasaki, Ducati u. v. m.
• Included sizes:
M 14 x 1.5 M 25 x 1.5 M 22 x 1.5
M 16 x 1.5 M 22 x 1.0 M 27 x 1.25
M 18 x 1.5 M 28 x 1.5 M 20 x 1.0
M 26 x 1.0 M 19 x 1.0 M 27 x 1.0
M 28 x 1.0 M 26 x 1.5 M 24 x 1.0

80713-00 Alternator puller


38 x 1,5 mm
Aprilia, BMW 650, Rotax Motors,
Suzuki, Burgmann

80714-00 Flywheel puller


M27 x 1,0 mm
suitable for alternator
and ignition system
Honda, Suzuki, Yamaha

87747-00 Rotor Puller


• suitable for generator and
ignition system
• M 22 x 1,50: Honda, Suzuki, Yamaha
• M 26 x 1.50: Bosch

88729-00 3-in-1 Clutch / Variator Tool for


Piaggio
• for blocking and removing the variator
and clutch bell
• integrated hex wrench for loosening
the coupling nut (34 mm)
• pin pitch: 55 mm
• made of stainless steel
• to be used as OEM 14569-PI
• suitable for many models of following manufacturers:
Aprilia, Derbi, Gilera, Italjet, Peugeot, Piaggio, Vespa

8/44
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS 8

Puller
PULLER

Universal puller
with forged jaws, reversible for inside and outside

80828-00 75 mm / 2 Arm
80829-00 100 mm / 2 Arm
80830-00 150 mm / 2 Arm
80831-00 225 mm / 2 Arm

80833-00 75 mm / 3 Arm
80834-00 100 mm / 3 Arm
80835-00 150 mm / 3 Arm
80836-00 225 mm / 3 Arm

80836-50 Puller set, 3-piece


• 75 mm - 2-ar
• 100 mm - 3-ar
• 150 mm - 3-ar

Industrial puller
Parallel form, with fine thread spindle,
forged, reversible for inside and outside,
clamping width mm x clamping depth mm

80837-00 90 x 100 mm

80837-10 130 x 100 mm

80837-20 160 x 150 mm

80837-30 200 x 150 mm

80837-40 250 x 200 mm

80917-20 Ball bearing puller


Specially designed for the quick pullout
of ball bearings.
Applicable to 19-45 mm diameters and
up to a maximum depth of 75 mm

8/45
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
8 STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS
Puller

PULLER

80827-50 Splitting Knife


Set
• incl. shifter
• incl. 2 splitting knifes: 30-50 mm and 50-75 mm
• for removing bearings, internal rings and
other tightly and narrowly mounted parts

87753-00 Splitting Knife Set


• splitting knives open from 75-105 mm
• total length of central bolt is 290 mm

Separator
Series 15
The separator jaws are clamped by
evenly tightening the nuts on the
side bolts. Removal is obtained by
tightening the spindle against the shaft end.

80813-00 5- 60 mm / 15-0
80814-00 12 - 75 mm / 15-1
80815-00 22 - 115 mm / 15-2
80816-00 25 - 155 mm / 15-3
80817-00 30 - 200 mm / 15-4

Puller device
To be connected to the separators, the tension
bolts are screwed into the threaded holes of the
separator jaws.
80823-00 50 - 110 mm / 18-0
80824-00 60 - 150 mm / 18-1
80825-00 60 - 200 mm / 18-2
80826-00 80 - 300 mm / 18-3
80827-00 120 - 380 mm / 18-4

8/46
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS 8

Puller
PULLER

80917-00 Puller set for


inner bearing
10-piece in a case; the 8-33 mm
expansion sleeves allow universal use.
The impact weight makes it easier to pull
out seized bearings.

Internal extractor
• For extracting inner bearings
bearing outer rings and bushings.
• Mechanical pressure screw.
• The internal extractors are equipped with an
internal safety stop to protect against excess
tension and overloading.

80911-05 5 - 8 mm
80911-10 6 - 10 mm
80911-20 8 - 12 mm
80911-30 10 - 14 mm
80912-00 12 - 16 mm
80913-00 14 - 19 mm
80914-00 18 - 23 mm
80915-00 20 - 30 mm
80916-00 28 - 40 mm
80916-50 35 - 46 mm

Counterstay
• Made of special steel
• With strong spindle
• Delivery without interior extractor

80911-00 5 - 40 mm
80911-01 18 -70 mm

80917-50 Slide hammer for


internal extractors
5-19 mm
80918-00 Slide hammer for
internal extractors
18 - 50 mm

Single internal extractors available on request.


8/47
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
8 STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS
plug tools
Spark

SPARK PLUG TOOLS

Spark plug socket


with rubber arrester
80292-00 16 mm - 3/8” Drive
80293-00 18 mm - 3/8” Drive
80294-00 21 mm - 3/8” Drive
80295-00 16 mm - 1/2” Drive
80296-00 21 mm - 1/2” Drive
with magnet
6080.14 14 mm - 3/8” Drive
80292-01 16 mm - 3/8” Drive
6080.18 18 mm - 3/8” Drive
80294-01 21 mm - 3/8” Drive
80295-01 16 mm - 1/2” Drive
80296-01 21 mm - 1/2” Drive

80297-00 Spark plug brush


with brass wire

80362-00 Spark plug pliers


with insulation

80299-00 Magnetic shell


150 mm Ø
• stainless finish
• very strong magnet
• rubber coated
• “no scratches“
• sold without the displayed contents

80299-50 Magnetic shell


With the one-sided heightened shape it is also
possible, for the first time, to store non-magnetic
parts made of aluminium, brass and rust-free
steel, and is thus indispensable in each
workplace

8/48
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS 8

schlüssel
Ölfilter-
ÖLFILTERSCHLÜSSEL

81039-00 30-piece End Cap Oil Filter Wrench Set


• black finish caps
• three leg oil filter wrench Ø65mm – Ø120mm
• adaptor 3/8" x 1/2"
• end cap oil filter wrench in following sizes:
• 65mm x 14-pt ,65 / 67mm x 14-pt -
66mm x 6-pt , 68mm x 14-pt,
73mm x 14-pt ,74mm x 15-pt, 74 / 76mm x
15-pt 75 / 77mm x 15-pt, 76mm x 8-pt
76mm x 12-pt , 76mm x 14-pt
76mm x 30-pt , 78mm x 15-pt
80mm x 15-pt , 80 / 82mm x 15-pt
86mm x 16-pt, 86mm x 18-pt
90mm x 15-pt, 92mm x 10-p
93mm x 15-pt, 93mm x 36-pt
93mm x 45-pt 95mm x 15-pt
96mm x 18-pt
100mm x 15-pt , 106mm x 15-pt
108mm x 15-pt, 108mm x 18-pt

81043-00 Oil Filter Cap for BMW K /


R 4-valve, 74 x 14

85073-00 Oil Filter Wrench for BMW


Motorcycles as of 2009
• suitable for all BMW motorcycle
with Ø 76 mm oil filters,
except the new K1200S / RS
• drive: 24 mm external hexagon and
1/2" internal square drive
• material: Aluminum

Oil Filter Wrench for


85074-00 Motorcycles from BMW,
Harley, Ducati
• for oil filter Ø 76 mm x 14 pt.
• suitable for following motorcycles:
BMW before 2009
Harley-Davidson
Ducati
• drive: 24 mm external hexagon
and 1/2" internal square drive
• Material: Aluminium

8/49
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
8
tools
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS
Hook

HOOK TOOLS

88440-00 2-piece Exhaust Rubber Hook Set


• for removing and mounting of exhaust rubber
• dip coated T-handles

80122-00 Seal Puller

• for assembly and disassembly of rotary shaft seals


• 320 mm length for fast and easy disassembly
• hardened pulling lever for long product life time
• anti-slip coated handle

88451-00 4-piece Hook Set


• is needed for laying of cables,
stuffing seats, etc
• piercer (straight), hook 90° angled,
hook with round head, double angled hook
• 2-component handles

Provided with
aluminium handle
chrome vanadium steel, chrome-plated

80525-00 40 - 42
80526-00 45 - 50
80527-00 52 - 55
80528-00 58 - 62
80529-00 68 - 75
80530-00 80 - 90
80531-00 95 - 100
80532-00 110 - 115
Adjustable hook
wrench
Chrome vanadium steel, chrome-plated

80540-00 15 - 35
80541-00 35 - 50
80542-00 50 - 80
80543-00 80 - 120
80545-00 120 - 180
8/50
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS 8
CUTTING

and drilling
Cutting
AND DRILLING

4000
814 059
Metal saw
• blade length 300 m
• made of flat steel, powde -coated
• with captive clamping pin
• with beech wood handl
• incl. PROM T bi-metal saw blade

4000
814 015
PUK metal saw
• blade length 150 mm
• made of round steel, polished galvanise
• with fixed handl
• incl. saw blad

4000
841 015
Wire brush
• 5-ro
• hardened steel wir
• hardened steel wir

4000
841 035
Wire brush
• 5-ro
• brass wire 0.30 m
• wooden bac

Screw extractor
Type 49
Made of impact resistant chrome vanadium.
To remove broken screws. In the part to be
removed,a hole is drilled with a spiral drill;
the extractor and the part are then unscrewed
by turning to the left.
80841-00 3 - 6 mm
80842-00 6 - 8 mm
80843-00 8 - 11 mm
80844-00 11 - 14 mm
80845-00 14 - 18 mm
80846-00 18 - 24 mm
80847-00 24 - 33 mm
80848-00 33 - 45 mm
80849-00 45 - 52 mm
80850-00 Set with 5 extractors size 1-5

80851-00 Set with 6 extractors size 1-6 Sets are delivered in plastic boxes!
80852-00 Set with 8 extractors size 1-8

8/51
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
8 STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS
and drilling

CUTTING
Cutting

AND DRILLING

4000 Quick-helix drill set,


862 050 HSS, 4-piece
• with straight shan
• Ø 3 - 14 mm, 5 - 20 mm, 16 - 30.5 m
• 1 drilling paste tube, 30
• in metal cas

4000 Step drill set,


862 088 HSS, 3-piece
• spiral fluted with split poin
• Ø 4 - 12 mm, 4 - 20 mm, 4 - 30 m
• in metal cas

4000 Spiral drill set,


861 940 HSS, 19-piece
Dimensions: 1.0 - 10.0 mm
Content: 19-piece
Cutting material: HSS
Ascending order steps of: 0.5 mm

4000 Spiral drill set,


861 945 HSS-TiN, 19-piece
Dimensions: 1.0 - 10.0 mm
Content: 19-piece
Cutting material: HSS-TiN
Ascending order steps of: 0.5 mm

4000
840 062
Equalling file
• with plastic handl
• cutting edge
• cutting edge length 200 m

4000
840 157
Half-round file
• with plastic handl
• cutting edge
• cutting edge length 200 m

4000
840 207
Round file
• with plastic handl
• cutting edge
• cutting edge length 200 m

8/52
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS 8
CUTTING

and drilling
Cutting
AND DRILLING

88462-00 25-piece HSS Screw Extractor Set


• for professional turning out of broken
screws and studs
• helps to reduce time and cost
• includes:
• 5 HSS drills: 3.2 - 4.8 - 6.4 - 8.0 - 8.7 mm
• 10 guide bushings for drills
• 5 extractor pins
• 5 extractor adapters
• HSS Steel

88799-00 Stud Bolt Extractor


• for loosening stuck studs
• suitable for loosening and tightening
• suitable for studs diameter from 6 to 19 mm
• knurled and hardened clamp wheel

81882-00 4-piece Stud Extractor


Set
• sizes: 6-8-10-12mm
• 1/2" drive

88378-00 17-piece Screw and Stud


Extractor Set
• solves problems with rounded or torn
off sockets and bolts
• contains:
• 5 screw extractors for left side thread for
loosening damaged internal hex screws
• 4 stud sockets 6 - 8 - 10 - 12 MM
• 8 special Zig Zag sockets for loosening
rounded off hexagon nuts
9-10-11-12-13-14-16-19 mm
(also used to tighten screws)
• all tools made of chrome molybdenum steel

8/53
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
8 STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS
and drilling

CUTTING
Cutting

AND DRILLING

4000 Threading tool set


867 530 M3 - M12, 31-piece
consisting of:
• each with 1 set M3, M4, M5, M6
M8, M10, M12 hand taps
• jeach with 1 M3, M4, M5, M6, M8
M10, M12 die holder
• each with 1 25 x 9 die holde
• each with 1 adjustable tap wrenc
size 1 1/2, each with 1 screwdriver
• in metal cas

4000 Threading tool set


867 531 M3 - M12, 45-piece
consisting of:
• each with 1 hand tap set, 3-piec
M3, M4, M5, M6, M8, M10, M12
• each with 1 M3, M4, M5, M6, M8
M10, M12 die holder
• each with
20 x 5, 20 x 7, 25 x 9, 30 x 11, 38 x 14
die holder
• each with 1 adjustable tap wrench size 1 +
• each with 1 screwdrive , thread gauge
• each with 1 core spiral dril
Ø 2.5/ 3.3/ 4.2/ 5.0/ 6.8/ 8.5/ 10.2 mm
• in metal cas

Thread cutters in inch sizes upon request!

82220-00 Cutting
tap drill
• in a patented folding bo
• 1/4” drive, HSS
• M3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 1

81601-00 Tool holder


with ratchet
• switchable, for tap drill
• M3 - M1

8/54
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS 8
CUTTING

and drilling
Cutting
AND DRILLING

Thread repair set


Spark plug thread
ISO metric thread, A2 stainless steel
Content:
• HELICOIL® plus thread bit
• HELICOIL® combined drilling and cutting too
• HELICOIL® plus buil -in spindle

81850-10 M10 x 1
each with 10 10-, 15- and 17.5-mm long bits
81850-12 M12 x 1.25
each with 10 12-, 16- and 24-mm long bits
81850-14 M14 x 1.25
each with 10 8.4-, 12.4- and 16.4-mm long bits

80418-61 Thread repair set


M5 - M12, 230 piece
ISO metric thread, A2 stainless steel
Content:
• HELICOIL® plus thread bits of differen
dimensions and lengths
• Spiral dril
• HELICOIL® hand tap made of HS
• HELICOIL® plus buil -in spindles
• tang brea -off tool

81805-00 Thread repair


set M5 Content:
- HELICOIL®
plus thread bits
81806-00 Thread repair in three lengths
- spiral drill
set M6 - HELICOIL®
hand taps
81808-00 Thread repair made of HSS
- HELICOIL®
set M8 plus built-in spindle
- tang break-off tool

81810-00 Thread repair


set M10 x 1,5
81812-00 Thread repair
set M12 x 1,75

Fine thread, inch thread and other sizes on request.


Refill packages on request.
8/55
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
8 STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS
and drilling

CUTTING
Cutting

AND DRILLING

81950-00 130-piece Thread


Repair Kit, M5-M12
• 5 HSS-G-twist drills
• 5 special installation tools
• 5 tang breakers
• 110 thread inserts, made from stainless steel:

each 25 pieces: M5x0.80,M6x1.00, M8x1.25,

M10x1.50 10 pieces: M12x1.75

Thread Repair
Kit, M5x0.8
• HSS-G-taps
• HSS-G-twist drills
• special installation tool
• tang breakers
• thread inserts

81952-00 M5 x 0,8
81953-00 M6 x 1,0
81954-00 M8 x 1,25
81955-00 M10 x 1,5
81956-00 M12 x 1,75
81957-00 M14 x 1,25
81958-00 M10 x 1,0
81959-00 M12 x 1,25

Thread repair set


Oil drain thread
The original thread is cut out in a single operation
and extended by one size.
Instead of the original locking screw, a larger locking
screw is screwed in with a matching sealing ring.
Oil drain thread repair assortments consisting of:
a special tap drill, 5 locking screws,
5 sealing rings in a 140 x 110 x 43 mm wooden box

80315-00 M12 x 1.5

80316-00 M14 x 1.5

80317-00 M16 x 1.5

8/56
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS 8

Striking
tools
STRIKING TOOLS

Engineer's hammer
• forged steel hammer head
• with steel ring wedge
• with double curved hickory handle
4000
811 022 200 grams
811 023 300 grams
811 025 500 grams
811 030 1000 grams

Soft face hammer


• hammer body made of galvanised cast iron
• head made of impact-resistant CA (cellulose acetate)
• with lacquered handle
4000
811 530 Ø 22 mm, 140 grams
811 532 Ø 32 mm, 310 grams
811 534 Ø 40 mm, 530 grams

Soft face hammer, recoilless


• with replaceable wear-resistant impact heads
• with high impact strength
• steel centre piece partially filled with steel shot,
hence recoilless
• impact action 100% greater than in normal
soft face hammers
Application areas:
• assembly / repair work in the automotive sector
• positioning of workpieces in the vice
• assembly of sharp-edged workpieces,
workpiece mating, sheet metal processing
4000
811 550 Ø 30 mm, 430 grams
811 552 Ø 40 mm, 750 grams
811 554 Ø 50 mm, 1000 grams

80428-00 Punch set


Size 5 mm

80429-00 Letter punch set


Size 5 mm

More sizes on request!

8/57
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
8 STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS
Consumables

CONSUMABLES

O-ring assortment
in a box, acid, petrol and oil-resistant

81060-00 225 pieces in 18 sizes


from 3 to 22 mm

81062-00 419 pieces in 32 sizes


from 3 to 50 mm

81063-00 Snap ring assortment


in a box, 285 pieces from 6 to 32 mm

81063-10 Innen-Sprengring-
Sortiment
in Kassette, 300 Stück von 3 - 32 mm

81064-00 Tension and compression


spring assortment in a box,
200 pieces 5.5 - 9.5 mm Ø, 10 - 80 mm long

81069-00 Shrinking hose


assortment in a box,
127 assorted pieces, usable up to 125° C,
with UL and CSA approval

81070-00 Spring split pin


assortment in a box,
150 assorted pieces, chrome plated

81071-00 Copper sealing ring


assortment
in a box, 150 assorted pieces,
each with 10 rings - 15 different sizes

8/58
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS 8

Consumables
CONSUMABLES

81072-00 Split pin assortment


in a box, 555 assorted pieces

81073-00 Hose clamps assortment


• 26-piec
• in a box, sizes included
4 40-mm pieces, 2 35-mm pieces
2 28-mm pieces, 4 25-mm pieces
6 22-mm pieces, 8 16-mm pieces

Cable tie
• it cannot be loosened, UL approve
• permanently impac -resistant and shatterproof
• resistant to: petrol, benzene, acetone
solvent for paints and lacquers, oil and grease
• temperature resistance: permanently up to abou
85° C, briefly up to about 130° C and to about - 40° C
• Material: olyamide (nylon) Packaging unit content: 100 pcs
4000
351 280 2.5 x 100 mm - VE 100 pcs

351 281 3.6 x 140 mm - VE 100 pcs

351 282 3.6 x 200 mm - VE 100 pcs

351 283 4.8 x 300 mm - VE 100 pcs

351 284 4.8 x 370 mm - VE 100 pcs

Cleaning cloth - paper roll


• blue, tissu -quality, from 100% recycled material
• highly absorbent, economical to us
• colourfast when associated with solvent
• volume embossed, with glue in between plie
• perforated, low lintin
• width 380 mm x length 380 mm, 500 sheet
9000
469 011 2-ply - PU 2 rolls
469 015 3-ply - PU 2 rolls

9000
469 108 Cleaning wipe santd mobile
• for cleaning wipe rolls up to 440 mm wide
• with holder for refuse sack
• cleaning wipe rolls and refuse sack not included

8/59
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
8 STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS
Consumables

CONSUMABLES

Protective gloves
• nylon knitted glove with nitrile coatin
• black without nub
Material:
• 3-thread support fabric, grey melange colou
• palm and fingertips with blac
micro-foam nitrile coating
• very good sense of touch, high abrasio
resistance, good fit and a sure grip
• breathable hand bac
Application: for work in the
high-tech industry and in clean rooms; packaging
4000
371 023 Size 7 - PU 12 pairs
371 024 Size 8 - PU 12 pairs
371 025 Size 9 - PU 12 pairs
371 026 Size 10 - PU 12 pairs

Disposable nitrile glove


• right and left fit
• material: nitrile
• disposable gloves
• Materialstärke: ca. 0,11 mm
• powder-free
• Box à 100 pc.
4000
371 515 Size M
371 516 Size L
371 517 Size XL

Disposable nitrile gloves


• Right and left suitable
• Material: Nitrile - powder free
• Roughened surface
• Material thickness: approx. 0.21 mm (extra strong)
• not sterile
• Box à 50 p.
• Application: care, cleaning, etc.
4000
371 525 Size M
371 526 Size L
371 527 Size XL

Further qualities and designs on request!

8/60
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS 8

Specials
SPECIALS

86349-00 Plastic Repair Kit


• for repairing cracks in plastic parts bigger
than 1 mm thickness
• suitable for plastic material with
max. 40% glass fiber content
• for repairing plastic bumpers, panels,
brackets, etc.
• includes repairing clamps in V-shape 0.6 mm ,
U-shape 0.6 mm and U-shape 0.8 mm
• this tools heats up the clamps to a temperature
between 100 and 200° C so that they can connect
the breaking points and bring back stability
• can also be used for enforcing strongly used areas
• includes: heating unit, charger, battery

86350-00 Electric soldering gun


with VDE plug, 100 watts

86351-00 Solder wire on spool


2 mm, 40% SN, 60% PB, 250 grams

86352-00 Soldering grease


according to DIN EN 29454-1, in a metal can,
50 grams

80410-00 Engraver
Signograph 25 diamond set, electric engraver
It is delivered in a set with diamond, carbide and
hardened gouge as well as two modelling pins
for soft metals such as copper, tin and aluminum foil.

80411-00 Engraver
Signograph 25 set, electric engraver,
powerful engraver, 25 watts,
with hardened gouge as well as replaceable
carbide gouge

8/61
The illustrations may show optional equipment not included in the scope of delivery.
Illustrations, descriptions, colours and measures are not binding and for illustrative purposes only. We reserve the right to changes without
prior notice.
8 STANDARD, SPECIAL AND MEASURING TOOLS
Specials

SPECIALS

88620-00 125 mm Stainless Steel Sharp Tip Tweezer


• especially useful for bonding and
loosening car wrapping, stickers,
etc.

83129-00 3-piece LED Tweezers Set


• particularly useful in poorly lit work areas